PROFILE Software R5000.1 - Learning The Basics Training

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 276
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document discusses the Symbol Manager tool in Landmark software which is used to create and edit symbols for use in applications.

The Symbol Manager tool is used to create and edit symbols for use in EDTTM applications. It allows mapping of symbols to components and filtering symbols based on attributes like manufacturer.

The main components displayed are the Mappings area, Symbol Preview area, Symbol color selector, and buttons to navigate between symbols.

PROFILE Software R5000.1:


Learning the Basics
Training Manual

© 2010 Halliburton

Part Number 162241 Revision D February 2011


© 2010 Halliburton
All Rights Reserved

This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also protected by
Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or
disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:

Halliburton | Landmark Software & Services


2107 CityWest Blvd, Building 2, Houston, Texas 77042-3051, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone:713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2015
Internet: www.halliburton.com/landmark

Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3D Surveillance, 3DFS, 3DView, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, Adaptive Mesh
Refining, ADC, Advanced Data Transfer, Analysis Model Layering, ARIES, ARIES DecisionSuite, Asset Data Mining, Asset Decision Solutions,
Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Asset Journal, Asset Performance, AssetConnect, AssetConnect Enterprise, AssetConnect
Enterprise Express, AssetConnect Expert, AssetDirector, AssetJournal, AssetLink, AssetLink Advisor, AssetLink Director, AssetLink Observer,
AssetObserver, AssetObserver Advisor, AssetOptimizer, AssetPlanner, AssetPredictor, AssetSolver, AssetSolver Online, AssetView, AssetView
2D, AssetView 3D, BLITZPAK, CasingLife, CasingSeat, CDS Connect, Channel Trim, COMPASS, Contract Generation, Corporate Data Archiver,
Corporate Data Store, Data Analyzer, DataManager, DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Management System, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace 3D Drill
View KM, DecisionSpace AssetLink, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace AssetSolver, DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace
Nexus, DecisionSpace Reservoir, DecisionSuite, Deeper Knowledge. Broader Understanding., Depth Team, Depth Team Explorer, Depth Team
Express, Depth Team Extreme, Depth Team Interpreter, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam
Interpreter, Desktop Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery Asset, Discovery Framebuilder, Discovery
PowerStation, DMS, Drillability Suite, Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, Drill-to-the-Earth-Model, Drillworks, Drillworks ConnectML,DSS, Dynamic
Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube, EDM, EDM AutoSync, EDT, eLandmark, Engineer’s Data Model, Engineer’s
Desktop, Engineer’s Link, ESP, Event Similarity Prediction, ezFault, ezModel, ezSurface, ezTracker, ezTracker2D, FastTrack, Field Scenario
Planner, FieldPlan, For Production, FZAP!, GeoAtlas, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, Geometric Kernel,
GeoProbe, GeoProbe GF DataServer, GeoSmith, GES, GES97, GESXplorer, GMAplus, GMI Imager, Grid3D, GRIDGENR, H. Clean, Handheld
Field Operator, HHFO, High Science Simplified, Horizon Generation, i WellFile, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, Infrastructure, Iso Core, IsoMap, iWellFile,
KnowledgeSource, Landmark (as a service), Landmark (as software), Landmark Decision Center, Landmark Logo and Design, Landscape, Large
Model, Lattix, LeaseMap, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Magic Earth, Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MDS Connect, MicroTopology, MIMIC,
MIMIC+, Model Builder, Nexus (as a service), Nexus (as software), Nexus View, Object MP, OpenBooks, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenVision,
OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWire Client, OpenWire Direct, OpenWire Server, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Development Kit, OpenWorks Production,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, Parametric Modeling, PetroBank, PetroBank Explorer, PetroBank Master Data Store, PetroStor,
PetroWorks, PetroWorks Asset, PetroWorks Pro, PetroWorks ULTRA, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack
ESP, PostStack Family, Power Interpretation, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerExplorer Connect, PowerGrid, PowerHub, PowerModel,
PowerView, PrecisionTarget, Presgraf, Pressworks, PRIZM, Production, Production Asset Manager, PROFILE, Project Administrator, ProMAGIC,
ProMAGIC Connect, ProMAGIC Server, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMax 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX 4D, ProMAX Family, ProMAX
MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, Query Builder, Quick, Quick+, QUICKDIF, Quickwell, Quickwell+, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE,
RAYMAP, RAYMAP+, Real Freedom, Real Time Asset Management Center, Real Time Decision Center, Real Time Operations Center, Real Time
Production Surveillance, Real Time Surveillance, Real-time View, Reference Data Manager, Reservoir, Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev,
ResMap, RTOC, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks 2D, SeisWorks 3D, SeisWorks
PowerCalculator, SeisWorks PowerJournal, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisWorks PowerView, SeisXchange, Semblance Computation and Analysis,
Sierra Family, SigmaView, SimConnect, SimConvert, SimDataStudio, SimResults, SimResults+, SimResults+3D, SIVA+, SLAM, SmartFlow,
smartSECTION, Spatializer, SpecDecomp, StrataAmp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataSim, StratWorks, StratWorks 3D, StreamCalc, StressCheck,
STRUCT, Structure Cube, Surf & Connect, SynTool, System Start for Servers, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Servers,
SystemStart for Storage, Tanks & Tubes, TDQ, Team Workspace, TERAS, T-Grid, The Engineer’s DeskTop, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs,
TOW/cs Revenue Interface, TracPlanner, TracPlanner Xpress, Trend Form Gridding, Trimmed Grid, Turbo Synthetics, VESPA, VESPA+, VIP, VIP-
COMP, VIP-CORE, VIPDataStudio, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-THERM, WavX, Web
Editor, Well Cost, Well H. Clean, Well Seismic Fusion, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellSolver, WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, You’re in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus are trademarks registered
trademarks or service marks of Halliburton.

All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are the trademarks or names of their respective owners.

Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
Halliburton. Halliburton assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not
allow disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Halliburton acknowledges that certain third party code has been bundled with, or embedded in, its software. The licensors of this
third party code, and the terms and conditions of their respective licenses, may be found in a document called Third_Party.pdf. This
document is included in the installation directory of each application from Landmark® software. The path name of the file is similar
to the following:

ApplicationInstallationDirectory/docs/Third_Party.pdf

or

ApplicationInstallationDirectory\help\Third_Party.pdf
PROFILE™ Software R5000.1:
Learning the Basics
Training Manual

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
PROFILE™ Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Well Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Data Quality Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Multiple Assembly Display Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Accurate Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Symbol Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
User Friendly Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Historical Data Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
PROFILE™ Software Concepts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Engineer’s Desktop™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
EDM™ Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Unit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
SAM - Simultaneous Activity Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Security in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Tight Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

PROFILE™ and Engineer’s Data Model™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Log in to the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics i


Contents

Data Entry Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5


Simple Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Picklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Spreadsheet Data Entry Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Using Spreadsheets in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Function Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Populating Cells in a Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Picklist Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Copy/Paste in Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Date Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Time Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Check Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Read Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Filter by Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

PROFILE™ Software Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14


Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Navigating the Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Navigating the Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Navigating the Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Searching Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Saving Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Viewing Glossary Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Context-sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Understanding Text Style Within Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Printing a Help Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

PROFILE™ Software Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

ii PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Contents

Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Print Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Print Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Symbol Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Symbol Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Well Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Unit System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Symbol Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Instant Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics iii


Contents

Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Symbol Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Symbol Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Add Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Delete Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Rename Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tab Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
PROFILE™ Software Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Operating the Well Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
General Functions in the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Drag-and-drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Copy-paste Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Renaming a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Data Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
How Data Locking Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Entering Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Unlocking Data Protected by a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Locking Data Levels Below the Company Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Well Explorer Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Database Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Company Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Site Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Well Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Wellbore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Wellbore Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Event Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Design Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

iv PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Contents

Associated Data Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65


Lessons Learned in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Attachments in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Creating Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
How Attachments are Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Well Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Event Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Date Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Moving Around the Date Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Date Bar Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Time Control for the Date Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Report Icon Right-click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
New Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Open Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Open Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Current Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SAM Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Wall Plot Composer Template Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Depth Reference Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Display Unit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

The Well Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Well Designer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Event Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Date Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Reference Datum Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Symbol Map Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Schematic Objects Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Symbol Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Reference Datum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Live Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics v


Contents

Well Designer Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7


View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Spreadsheets in Well Designer Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Trajectory Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Trajectory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Trajectory Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Hole Section Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Drillstring/BHA Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Drag-and-drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Set Active Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Component Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Casing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Jewelry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Cementing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Wellbore Equipment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Drag-and-drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Set Active Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Component Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Rod Strings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Drag-and-drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Set Active Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Jewelry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Umbilicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Wellbore Openings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Stimulations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Wellheads Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
New Design Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Filter Data by Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Data Quality Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Data Analysis Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Type Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Severity Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Report Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Date Ranges Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Drag-and-drop String Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Section Type Picklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Previous Page/Next Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

vi PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Contents

Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Order of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
To Place a Symbol on the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Right-click Menu for Symbols on the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Delete Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Delete Entire Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
To Move the Entire Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

The Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Wall Plot Composer Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Templates in the Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Save Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Save As Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Components in the Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Changing the Ruler Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Changing the Margins Using the Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Wall Plot Composer Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Tab Layout Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Tab Properties Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Default Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Paper Size Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Page Layout Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Margins Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Object Scaling Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Wall Plot Composer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Object Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Layout Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics vii


Contents

Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16


Selecting Objects and Subobjects on the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Moving Objects or Subobjects on the Wall Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Deleting Objects or Subobjects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Resizing Objects or Subobjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Aligning Objects and Subobjects on the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Object Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Object Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Schematic Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
BHA Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Wellbore, Wellhead, and
Multi-Lateral Schematic Object Properties Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Geological Column Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Data Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
XY Graph Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Section Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Plan Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Days vs Depth Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Production Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
3D Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Picture Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Text Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Art Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Edit Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Sequential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Delete Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Open/Close Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Straight Segments/Curved Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Cut/Copy/Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Right-click Menu Items for all Art Tool Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Group/Ungroup/Regroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Working with Objects on the Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Adding an Object to the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Adding an Art Object to the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

viii PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Contents

Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Symbols in the PROFILE™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Using Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3


Building Blocks for Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Modify Symbol Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Creating Perforations or Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Creating Offset Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Building Symbols using Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9


Navigating Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Tree Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Symbol Properties Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Symbol Tree Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Copy And Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Renaming Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Symbol Tree Right-click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Preview Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Preview Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Component Properties Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Section Properties Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Features Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Symbol View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Quality (Tree Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Lighting (Tree Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Cutaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Background Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Rotate and Magnify Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Rotate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics ix


Contents

Gradient Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32


Tree Mode Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Building a Stabilizer in Tree Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Adding Threads to a Symbol in Tree Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Creating Packers and Seals in Tree Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Sketch Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Sketch Mode Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Image Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Profile, Outer Features, and Inner Features Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Symbol View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Sketch Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Section Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Sketch Mode Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Editing Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Section Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Sketch Mode Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Freehand Sketch of a Basic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Trace Sketch of a Basic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Importing Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Import Symbol Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Symbol Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74


Symbol Mappings Dialog Box—PROFILE™ Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Symbol Mappings Dialog Box—Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Symbol Map Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Mapping Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Mapped Symbols Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Symbol Preview Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Symbol Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Repeating Symbol Preview Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81

x PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 1
Introduction
The PROFILE™ software is a completion design and Wellbore schematic visualization tool
integrated on the Engineer’s Desktop™ software.

The PROFILE software allows the user to view the Wellbore equipment configuration at any
stage in the life of the Well. From spud to Total Depth, from workover to completion and to final
abandonment, all relevant Well information is available with a mouse click. The PROFILE
software provides rapid access and review of detailed Well operations information for more
accurate decision making and improved reporting. The PROFILE software also enables engineers
to design any number of planned Completions, which can later be used to populate operations
reports in the OpenWells® software. The OpenWells and PROFILE software can be used
concurrently to give immediate visual feedback, thus ensuring data integrity and facilitating
improved data quality. This improved workflow efficiency can reduce cycle time and simplify the
production of Wellbore schematics.

The Well Designer editors enable users to enter or edit downhole equipment and operations data.
Editors are available for Wellbore Trajectories, Hole Sections, Casing, Cement intervals,
Completion Assemblies, and other downhole mechanical information.

Using the PROFILE software, engineers can create any number of custom Wall Plot formats and
equipment symbols. Users can create and save standard output templates for any kind of
downhole sketch. A Template Editor enables users to select what parameters are presented for
different data types and configure how they are displayed in the schematic. PROFILE templates
may contain Wellbore schematics, stratigraphic columns, equipment detail tracks, data tables,
summaries, and directional plots. Once a template has been constructed, it can be saved to the
database and reused on any Well stored within the Engineer’s Data Model™ software (EDM™)
database. The PROFILE software also analyzes the equipment information and displays error,
warning, and/or information messages in a Data Quality Report.

The Symbol Manager enables fully comprehensive symbol management with portable symbol
file format, and provides highly detailed multi-dimensional symbols with cutaways and a rich set
of equipment section types. This allows users to modify provided symbols or create custom
symbols. A mapping editor enables users to link equipment and operations symbols to equivalent
codes used within the PROFILE and OpenWells software, so that the appropriate symbols are
used to render the equipment.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 1-1


Chapter 1: Introduction

Along with the PROFILE software, Release 5000.1.7 includes other software: OpenWells,
Real-Time View™, COMPASS™, WELLPLAN™, CasingSeat™, and StressCheck™. It also
includes the Data Analyzer™, EDM Publishing Services, and iWellFile™ software. The PROFILE
software provides further integration with the addition of the following Production applications
on the Engineer’s Data Model software: ARIES™ software, TOW/cs® programs, and
DSS™ software.

The exercises included with this course highlight the features and functionality available in the
PROFILE software. Landmark® recognizes that, in many cases, data entry will occur in the
OpenWells software with limited data entered in the PROFILE software.

PROFILE™ Software Overview

The PROFILE 5000.1.7 training course, User Training—Learning the


Basics is intended to give you the necessary tools to thoroughly
document Well Completions and create high quality Wellbore
equipment schematic Wall Plots.

After completing this course, you should be able to:

❏ describe and use the PROFILE software’s basic components.


❏ navigate the PROFILE main screen in order to locate specific
data sets.
❏ describe the relationship between the PROFILE software and the
Engineer’s Data Model software.
❏ list all Wellbore information that is supported by the
PROFILE software.
❏ describe the three Design types.
❏ enter data for the various equipments shown in the Well Designer’s
live schematic.
❏ review and edit data where necessary based on the Data
Quality Report.
❏ create a Design using the New Design Wizard.
❏ construct a Drillstring using drag-and-drop editor.
❏ describe and use all elements of the PROFILE Wall Plot Composer.
❏ create and customize all drawing objects available in the Wall Plot
Composer.

1-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 1: Introduction

❏ use the Art Tools in the Wall Plot Composer.


❏ describe all areas in the Symbol Manager Utility.
❏ map a symbol to a component type using the Symbol
Mapping editor.

About This Manual


This training manual compliments the instruction provided in the
PROFILE User Training—Learning the Basics course.

Each section of this manual corresponds to a section completed in the


course and can be used both during and after the course to answer
questions that you may have about the PROFILE software.

System Overview

Well Explorer
The Well Explorer provides a common data navigation and management
interface consistent with other EDM Drilling and Completions
applications. It enables engineers to organize their Well data sets by
Company, Project, and Site for easy navigation. The Well Explorer
supports the attachment of electronic documents and folders at all levels.

Well Designer
The Well Designer provides a data entry and editing interface that
enables the user to view, create, or update planned or actual Wellbore
equipment and operations information. For actual Designs, this
information integrates with OpenWells reports (page 3-7). Data updates
are automatically shown in the live schematic.

Wall Plot Composer


The Wall Plot Composer allows the user to create and save output
templates for the most commonly constructed Wellbore assemblies. The
PROFILE software uses the Wall Plot Composer to construct output
formats incorporating summary information, graphs, 1D and 2D
schematic frames, and survey plot information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 1-3


Chapter 1: Introduction

Data Quality Report


The Data Quality Report provides a simple tool for reviewing entered
information and checking for missing or anomalous information.

Multiple Assembly Display Capabilities


The PROFILE software supports and automatically draws multiple
assemblies, including dual completions and concentric assemblies.

Accurate Schematics
Accurate 1D equipment schematics, 2D directional schematics, and 2D
or 3D Wellhead schematics can be displayed in the PROFILE software.
There is also a component data viewer for visualizing component data.

Symbol Manager
The Symbol Manager Utility included with the PROFILE software
enables fully comprehensive symbol management with a portable
symbol file format, and provides highly detailed multi-dimensional
symbols with cutaways and a rich set of equipment section types. This
Utility allows users to modify provided symbols or create their own
custom symbols.

User Friendly Interface


The PROFILE software provides a simple Wellbore completion
construction interface, component selection, and drag-and-drop
assembly editor for quick designs.

Historical Data Viewing


For Actual Designs with data entered through OpenWells Reports, users
can use the Event Bar and Date Bar to browse historically through any
Wellbore. Wellbore configuration and downhole content can be viewed
from Well spud to initial completion and workovers to
final abandonment.

1-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 1: Introduction

PROFILE™ Software Concepts and Terminology

Engineer’s Desktop™ Software


The Engineer’s Desktop software is a suite of Drilling, Completions,
Production, and Economics applications integrated on the Engineer’s
Data Model software. The Engineer’s Data Model (EDM) software is
the Landmark Drilling, Well Services, Data Management, and
Production and Economics integration platform. EDM provides a
common database schema that allows for common data access, enables
naturally integrated engineering workflows, and reduces data entry
duplication across applications.

The EDM database drives integration between the Landmark Drilling


and Completions products by enabling the PROFILE software to use
and share the same data set with other engineering applications.

Release 5000.1.7 Engineering applications include:

• CasingSeat—Casing shoe size and depth selection.

• StressCheck—Casing Design.

• COMPASS—Directional Well Planning, Survey Data


Management, and Anti-collision Risk Assessment.

• WELLPLAN—Suite of drilling engineering analysis modules


including Torque/Drag, Hydraulics, Cementing, Well Control,
Stuck Pipe, BHA Drill Ahead analysis, Critical Speed string
vibration analysis, Swab Surge, and Engineering Notebook.

• OpenWells—Comprehensive wellsite operations reporting,


communications, analysis, and engineering system.

• Data Analyzer—Domain-focused ad-hoc querying tool for drilling


and completions engineers.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 1-5


Chapter 1: Introduction

• Real-Time View—A visualization and analysis tool used by


engineers for viewing time-based drilling data logs for any selected
Well, Event, Report, or Activity.

• iWellFile—Well operations reporting and analysis web site that


provides instant access to Well operations information, output
reports, downhole schematic diagrams, and analytical results
available within the Engineer’s Data Model (EDM) software.

• PROFILE—Data-driven Wellbore equipment schematic diagrams


allowing the visualization of currently installed and historical
Wellbore information and downhole equipment; allows for quick
entry of Wellheads and downhole equipment.

The Engineer’s Desktop engineering applications share many User


Interface components including:

• Well Explorer for consistent Data Management and Navigation


• Audit Information
• Reference Datum Levels (RDL)
• Unit System Editor
• Simultaneous Activity Monitor (Multi-User Support)
• Output Reporting Engine
• Security
• Lessons Learned data entry
• Data Locking
• XML data transfer
• Catalogs
• Libraries

EDM™ Database
The EDM database is a mix of common data tables, common
infrastructure tables, and application-specific data tables. The common
data tables allow the applications to naturally integrate through sharing
of a single data hierarchy and common data such as surveys, assemblies,
and formation tops. Data required in a specific application is stored
within dedicated application data tables.

All applications communicate with the EDM database through data


handler layers. Most commonly, the EDM Data Services toolkit
developed by Landmark is used. Data Services handles all of the select,
insert, update, and delete transactions required by the application and
also provides for Import and Export of data transfer files using XML as
the transfer file architecture.

1-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 1: Introduction

Unit Systems
All numeric data is stored internally within EDM to API units. A Unit
System Editor enables users to view this information to any
configuration of units they require.

EDM ships with three default viewing unit systems:

• API (American Petroleum Institute)

This unit system is based on the Imperial system of measurements:


Feet (ft), Inches (in), Pounds (lb), Quart (qt), Gallon (gal),
Fahrenheit (°F).

• API - US Survey Feet (American Petroleum Institute)

This unit system in based on the API system described above. It has
the ability to display units in fractions. Map units are in ft.

• SI (Non-US International System of Units)

This unit system is based on the Metric system of measurements. Its


units are identical in all languages: Meters (m), Centimeters (cm),
Millimeters (mm), Kilograms (kg), Liters (L), Celsius (°C).

The Engineer’s Desktop software also allows for the creation of a


customized unit system based on either one of the above systems.

For more information on Unit Systems, click the Help button onthe Unit
System Editor dialog box.

SAM - Simultaneous Activity Monitor


The 5000.1.7 release of the Engineer’s Data Model software supports
full concurrency for multiple applications accessing the same data set
through the Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM). The Simultaneous
Activity Monitor consists of a Messaging Server. This service notifies a
user of all data items currently open by other applications sharing the
same database. SAM does not indicate what its own application is
doing; it is merely a messenger service that monitors other applications
that access the same EDM database.

SAM displays as icons in the Status Bar (see “Status Bar” on page 3-76)
and the Well Explorer (see “SAM - Simultaneous Activity Monitor” on
page 1-7).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 1-7


Chapter 1: Introduction

Security in the PROFILE™ Software


Security in the PROFILE software is based on user authentication and
validation, user/group management, and application security. The
System Administration course and manual covers all aspects of
managing security in the PROFILE software and the rest of the
Engineer’s Desktop software.

Data Locking can help secure data in your database. For more
information on Data Locking, see “Data Locking” on page 3-42.

Tight Groups
Tight Groups are used to restrict access to the Project Site and Well
levels of the Well Explorer hierarchy. Each Project Site and Well is
associated with a particular Tight Group. Project Sites and Wells to
which the User or their Group does not have Tight Group access are not
displayed. This security measure effectively prevents the user from
accessing this data. For a restricted Project Site, all Wells, Wellbores,
Events, and Designs within that Project Site are hidden. For restricted
Wells, all Wellbores, Events, and Designs are hidden. Tight Group
creation and membership can be managed by your System
Administrator using the EDM Administration Utility.

1-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2
Getting Started

Overview

In this chapter, you will learn how to:

❏ describe the relationship between the PROFILE™ software and the


Engineer’s Data Model™ software.
❏ log in to the PROFILE software.
❏ demonstrate the proper use of all data entry field types.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-1


Chapter 2: Getting Started

PROFILE™ and Engineer’s Data Model™ Software

The EDM™ database schema allows for common data access. This
means that one set of data can be accessed from several different
applications. For example:

Grizzly Well
PROFILE OpenWells

Engineer’s Desktop™ applications accessing the Grizzly Well in the


EDM database
The database also enables naturally integrated workflows. The
directional Well planning of a trajectory for a Well can take place in
other applications (such as the COMPASS™ software), then be used in
the PROFILE software to display directional schematics, and also be
used in the OpenWells® software to compare Drilling progress
against plan.

The common database reduces duplication of data entered between


applications. Some of the same data entered in the OpenWells software
is also required to render a schematic in the PROFILE software. If the
data, such as a survey, is entered in the COMPASS software, it will not
have to be re-entered in the PROFILE software.

Data sets used in the PROFILE software and also commonly used in
other EDM applications include:

• Surveys • Rod Strings

• Hole Sections • Wellbore Openings

• Casings • Stimulated Intervals


• Drillstrings/Bottomhole Assemblies • Completion Equipments

• Cemented Intervals • Wellheads

• Wellbore Equipments • Annular Fluids

The following icon is used in the PROFILE Well Explorer to represent


the EDM Database:

2-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Log in to the PROFILE™ Software

To log in to the PROFILE software, double-click the PROFILE icon on


your desktop.

Alternatively, to open the PROFILE software, follow the menu path:

Start > Programs > Landmark Engineer’s Desktop 5000.1 >


PROFILE

The following PROFILE login screen displays:

PROFILE Login Screen

Use the drop-down picklist to select the EDM Data Source and connect
to the database.

Note

If you are uncertain about the Data Source to be used, contact your
System Administrator.

Enter your User name and Password.

Note

If you are uncertain about your username or password, contact your


System Administrator.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-3


Chapter 2: Getting Started

The next time that the PROFILE software is launched, the most recently
used data source is remembered and displayed automatically in the login
dialog box.

The PROFILE product screen displays, followed by the main screen.


For more information on the main screen and its components, see
“PROFILE™ Software Main Screen” on page 3-2.

All EDT™ Drilling and Completion applications share a common login.


Once the PROFILE software is launched, other EDM applications may
then be launched without requiring the user to re-log in.

2-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Data Entry Types

Information may be entered into the PROFILE software using a number


of data entry tools.

Simple Data
Simple Data Fields or text fields are fields that require a keyboard entry
that corresponds to the field title. Some Simple Data Fields will only
accept specific data in specific formats (for example: telephone
numbers, time). This means that the field has been set to accept a certain
type of value such as ten digits for a phone number.

To navigate between simple data fields:

• Press Tab to move forward (to the right or down) from one field to
the next.

• Use the mouse to position the cursor in the field and click the left
mouse button once.

• Press Shift+Tab to move backward (to the left or up) one field.

Picklist
Picklists are drop-down selection lists designed to simplify and expedite
data entry and ensure data integrity and consistency by providing a
selection of valid entries to complete a field.

A picklist is accessed through a drop-down arrow ( ).

Select the drop-down picklist to display a predefined list of valid values


for the field. Alternatively, press F4 when the picklist field is selected to
display the list.

Picklist contents may be edited by your System Administrator through


the EDM Administration Utility.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-5


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Spreadsheets
In the PROFILE software, spreadsheets are an ideal way to present a
number of information types that are captured (for example, string
components) within a common use area.

A spreadsheet is a collection of individual data fields (cells) arranged in


rows and columns. Spreadsheets allow the user to edit data within a cell
and see the change immediately. One advantage of spreadsheets is their
ability to collect and display a large amount of data in a small space.

Spreadsheets can extend both vertically and horizontally. When the size
of a spreadsheet or table exceeds the size of its display area, scroll bars
will appear, allowing the user to navigate through the entire spreadsheet.

Spreadsheet Data Entry Features

Column Headings
Spreadsheets have column headings that hold a descriptive title to
clarify the data currently displayed or the data to be entered in the
column. Columns with a unit class, such as feet, assigned will display
the unit label, ft, in parenthesis after the column name.

Spreadsheet column widths can also be adjusted. Widths can be


manipulated to fit the widest text entry in any cell of the column. To
change the column width, move the cursor to the dividing line between
the headers until a double-headed arrow appears. Click and drag the
column to the required width.

Note

The PROFILE software remembers any adjustments made to the width and
position of the columns within a Spreadsheet. The adjustments are saved to an
XML file in the user’s settings folder. (\Documents and Settings\<user>\
ApplicationData\Landmark\PROFILE\ UserPreferences.xml).

Using Spreadsheets in the PROFILE™ Software


Spreadsheets contain interactive data fields, which means data can be
entered and edited directly in the cells of the spreadsheet. There are three
fundamental operations for PROFILE spreadsheets: add a row, insert a
row, and delete a row.

2-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

To enter new data in a spreadsheet, a new row must be added to accept


that data.

Function Icons
At least two function icons are always associated with a spreadsheet.

Spreadsheet Function Icons


Icon Name Function

Add Row Adds a row to the bottom of the spreadsheet.

Delete Row(s) Deletes the current row in the spreadsheet.


Select multiple rows to delete several rows at
one time.
In some spreadsheets, only one row can be
deleted at a time. If this is the case the, tooltip
will read “Delete Current Row.”

There are additional function icons associated with some spreadsheets.

Additional Spreadsheet Function Icons


Icon Name Function

Insert Row Inserts a row above the selected


row in the spreadsheet.

Move Current Row Up Use this button to move a row up


one position in the spreadsheet.

Move Current Row Down Use this button to move a row


down one position in the
spreadsheet.

These spreadsheet functions are also available through the


right-click menu.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-7


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Populating Cells in a Spreadsheet


Cells in a spreadsheet row can be populated in a number of ways:

• Select the cell and enter the information through the keyboard.

• Select the picklist icon to the right of the cell ( ) or press F4.

To move from cell to cell in the spreadsheet, the following keyboard


options are available:

Keyboard Options Available in Spreadsheets


Keyboard Key Use

Tab Press the Tab key to move the cursor across a spreadsheet
row, left to right, one cell at a time.

Shift + Tab Use this keyboard combination to move across a spreadsheet


row backwards from right to left, one cell at a time.

Enter Press the Enter key to move the cursor across a spreadsheet
row, left to right, one cell at a time.

Arrow Press the directional arrow keys on the keyboard to move in


the direction of the arrow pressed, one cell at a time.

Alternatively, the mouse can be used to navigate through


the spreadsheet.

Picklist Icon
When a picklist icon ( ) is located next to a cell, a picklist is available
for that cell. Picklists may be opened by either clicking the picklist icon
or pressing F4 when the cell has been selected. Not all spreadsheets
contain picklists. Picklists can be configured using the
OpenWells software.

Copy/Paste in Spreadsheets
Use the Edit > Copy menu command to copy a selected row in a Well
Designer tab spreadsheet.

2-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Alternatively, click the Copy icon ( ), located on the Main toolbar, to


access the Copy command. For spreadsheets, you can also press Ctrl+C
or select from the right-click menu.

Note

The Copy command in the Edit menu is only available when a spreadsheet row is
selected in the Well Designer or the Wall Plot Composer is open.

Date Entries
Date entries in the PROFILE software can be made using the date
selection drop-down list. This dialog box is accessed through a drop-
down arrow ( ) that looks similar to the arrow used to access picklists.

Using the Date Selection dialog box reduces errors that result from
entering dates in the wrong format (for example, entering the date in
dd/mm/yyyy format instead of mm/dd/yyyy).

All dates are entered in the Windows® short date format to ensure the
date can be stored in any ODBC compliant database without
modification. If a date is entered with the year in a two-digit format (dd/
mm/yy), an error is returned. By forcing the date to be entered in the
short date format, the PROFILE software ensures the correct date is
saved in the database.

The order of MM, DD, YYYY is taken from the local PC’s Regional
Settings short date configuration to ensure that dates can be entered
according to local convention. To change the date format, you must
change it in Windows Regional Settings.

Time Entries
Time can be manually entered in the data entry field or the scroll buttons
can be used to scroll to the correct time.

The time format can be set to either a 24-hour clock or a 12-hour clock
using the Windows Regional Settings on your computer.

When using a time field, the time is laid out in hours and minutes: 00:00.
Change the value in the hours position by clicking on the hours segment
and scrolling up or down using the arrow buttons to the right of the field.
Minutes and seconds (where available) can be changed the same way.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-9


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Check Boxes
Many of the Wall Plot Composer property pages in the PROFILE
software contain check boxes.

Check box fields have only two settings: they are either activated or
deactivated. When the box beside the field title is empty, the field is
deactivated, and the function expressed in the field title is ignored.
When the box is filled with a check mark (activated), the field is active
and the function expressed in the field title is carried out.

To change the status of a check box field, click the box once.

Catalogs
Catalogs are used to collate a list of available string components and
their properties. These catalogs are shared by various EDM applications
as selection lists for various drilling equipment types, including Drill
Pipes, Drill Collars, Centralizers, Mud Motors, and MWD tools. For
completions entered in the PROFILE software, catalogs are available
for Packers, Pump Rod, Electrical Submersible Pumps, Progressing
Cavity Pumps, Tubing, Sand Control Screens, Intelligent Well Tools,
and more.

Catalogs are available in the PROFILE software through the Catalog


icon ( ). Catalog selection is available in the following tabs in the
Well Designer: Drillstring/BHA, Casing, Wellbore Equipment, Rod
Strings, and Wellheads. Additionally, the Wellheads tab has a Hanger
Catalog icon ( ) to access specific hanger catalogs.

The Well Explorer tree also has a Catalog node ( ). This node allows
the user to open the Catalog Editor Utility provided with the Engineer’s
Desktop software. To open the Catalog Editor, right-click the Catalog
node and select Open from the drop-down menu. Catalogs are created
and stored within this utility. See Catalog Editor Help for
more information.

The following example outlines how to select a catalog entry for a


Casing string component on the Well Designer’s Casing tab. It is
assumed that a string and associated component entry exist in
the spreadsheet.

2-10 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Open a Design and select the Casing tab in the Well Designer. Use the
Section Type picklist to select the appropriate equipment. Click the
Catalog icon.

Catalog Reset
picklist button

Casing/Tubing Catalog Dialog Box

The Catalog picklist allows the user to select a catalog if more than one
is available for the section type selected.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-11


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Double-click to make an initial selection in any one of the columns. This


narrows down the selections available in the columns below the Catalog
field. The example below shows a selection process starting with the
left column.

1. Select 2. Select from second 3. When selection is


from first and then complete, click OK.
column. third column.

Casing/Tubing Catalog Dialog Box: Selection Process

Double-click an item in any one of the columns and the selections will
again be filtered.

As data is selected in each column, the other columns are dynamically


changed to reflect the remaining selections available. Once a selection
is made in all columns, the OK button becomes available. Click OK to
use the catalog selection.

The Reset button resets all columns in the catalog if the user wishes to
change the selection.

Read Only
Some data fields in the PROFILE software may appear as yellow fields.
These are read-only fields from the EDM database and cannot be edited
in the PROFILE software.

2-12 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Filter by Date
Data that is shaded purple in the spreadsheets is not displayed in the
schematic while the current display date is active. The Filter by Date
feature hides all data in the editors with dates not applicable to the
current display date and removes all purple shaded rows from the
spreadsheets. This feature is only available when the Well Designer or
Wall Plot Composer is open with an Actual Design.

When the Filter Data By Date command is deactivated, information that


is not seen in the current schematic will appear highlighted in purple.
Users should not expect to see this data displayed in the schematic.
Notice in the example below (an Abandonment project) that the first
three rows are not shaded and the fourth row is shaded purple. In this
case, 7” Production Liner #1 was pulled prior to the display date and is
not seen in the schematic while the first three assemblies are displayed.

Unfiltered Spreadsheet

By default, the Filter by Date command is deactivated. To activate the


Filter Data By Date command, follow the menu path: Well Designer >
Filter Data By Date. Alternatively, click the Date Filter icon ( ) to
access the Filter Data By Date command. For further information about
this feature, see “Filter Data by Date” on page 4-37.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-13


Chapter 2: Getting Started

PROFILE™ Software Online Help

The online electronic help system has been developed to allow for
maximized usage of the PROFILE software through context-sensitive
application information.

Accessing Help
You can access PROFILE online help with the following:

• Follow the menu path: Help >Contents.


• Click the Help icon ( ) located on the Toolbar.
• Press F1 to access context-sensitive help.
• Click Help in a dialog box.

Navigating the Help System


The online help system can be navigated using the Table of Contents,
Index, and Search methods.

While navigating through the Help System, you can return to pages you
have viewed by using the Back and Forward buttons. These buttons
function the same way they would when navigating through recently
viewed pages on the Internet.

The Help System interface also includes Favorites and Glossary tabs,
which are discussed below.

Navigating the Table of Contents


The Contents divides help topics into open ( ) books, closed ( )
books, and pages ( ).

To view the Contents, select the Contents tab. Click a book to view the
associated chapters and pages contained within it. Click a page to view
the topic in the HTML viewing area on the right.

2-14 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Navigating the Index


To find information quickly on a specific help topic, select the Index tab.
A list of keywords will appear in the column on the left. Click a keyword
to access the help topic or a menu of available help topics, or enter a
keyword in the search field provided.

Searching Help
To search the online help, click the Search tab. To perform a full-text
search, enter search words in the Type in the keyword to find: field and
click the List Topics button.

Saving Favorites
Certain topics may hold information you wish to reference periodically,
without the need for a repeated search of the Help System. The Favorites
tab allows you to bookmark the active topic. When a topic is displayed
that you wish to bookmark as a Favorite, select the Favorites tab and
click the Add button. The topic title is then placed in the Topics list and
can be selected for quick reference at a later time.

Viewing Glossary Terms


A glossary is included in PROFILE Help that contains specific terms
used in the application, and common oil and gas industry terminology
and acronyms. To access this feature, click the Glossary tab, enter the
first letter of the term you wish to find, and use the scroll bar to scan the
terms. Once the term is found, click its name to view the definition in
the lower text field.

Context-sensitive Help
Context-sensitive help displays information on demand about the active
component in the window. Inthe PROFILE software, it can be accessed
using one of the following two methods:

• Click the Help button. Some dialog boxes contain a Help button,
which will display the Help topic for that specific dialog box.

• Press F1. When an application component in the window is


active, press F1 to view the specific help topic for that
component. Context-sensitive help using the F1 key is not
available for all areas in the PROFILE software.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 2-15


Chapter 2: Getting Started

Understanding Text Style Within Online Help


When navigating through this online help, there are some typographical
conventions to be aware of:

• Menu paths are documented in the following manner: A menu


path appears in bold with an arrow (>) separating each menu
level. For example, if you are instructed to select the Exit
command from File menu, it appears as File > Exit. If you are
instructed to select the Well command from the New submenu
in the File menu, it appears as File > New > Well.

• All field and control names used in a procedure appear in


bold text.

• Keys on your keyboard that you are instructed to press appear in


bold (such as Esc). Keys that must be pressed in sequence are
connected by a plus (+) sign and appear in bold. For example:
Press Ctrl+O to open a selected item.

• Buttons that appear on screen are documented in bold. For


example: Click OK.

• The term “click” is used when you should press the primary
mouse button. This button is the one used for most operations.
The term “right-click” is used when you should press the
secondary mouse button. This button is used for
auxiliary operations.

• References to external documents, such as Catalog Editor Help,


appear in italics.

Printing a Help Topic


To print the currently open topic, click the Print icon in the online help
navigation bar or press Ctrl+P.

2-16 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3
Navigating in the
PROFILE™ Software

Overview

In this chapter, you will learn how to:

❏ label and describe the basic components of the PROFILE™


software main screen.
❏ navigate the PROFILE main screen to locate specific data.
❏ list all Wellbore information that is supported by the
PROFILE software.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-1


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

PROFILE™ Software Main Screen

The PROFILE main screen is made up of several components:


Title Bar Menu Bar Main Toolbar Symbol Mapping
Event Bar

Filter Bar Date Bar

Recent Well
Bar Designer
Toolbar
Well
Explorer
Datum in
Associated
EDM
Data
Viewer

Well
Configuration

Reference Live Schematic Wall Plot


Datum Well Designer
Composer

Labeled PROFILE Main Window

Title Bar
The Title Bar contains the name of the Application (PROFILE) and the
Minimize, Maximize, and Close Application buttons. The Title Bar also
displays the names of the Well-Wellbore-Design for the active data set.

To move the application window to another part on the screen, drag the
Title Bar using the mouse.

To toggle the application frame between its maximized and restored


states, double-click the Title Bar.

3-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The following table explains the use of the three buttons on the right side
of the Title Bar:

Function Buttons in the Title Bar


Button Function

Minimizes the application to the Task Bar.

Toggles the application frame between maximized and


restored states.

Closes the application.

Individual windows also have title bars. They behave much like the
application’s title bar in that they contain similar menus and buttons.
You can use them to move the window to a different location on
the screen.

Menu Bar
The Menu Bar is located at the top of the Application Window. It
contains commonly used commands.

The following Menu Bar items are available in the PROFILE Main
Application Window: File, Edit, View, Well Designer, Composer,
Tools, Window, and Help.

File
The File menu in the PROFILE main Menu Bar contains commands that
enable the user to create, open, import, export, and set up for printing
schematics. Some commands are only available when the Well Designer
or Wall Plot Composer is open.

The File menu contains the following commands: New, Open, Close,
Save, Reload, Save As, Import, Export, Print, Print Preview, Print
Setup, Properties, and Exit.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-3


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

New
The New command is used to create a new data item in the PROFILE
Well Explorer (for example: Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore,
Event, or Design). The New command can also be used to access the
Instant Design feature in the PROFILE software or add an attachment to
a data item.

The availability of data items in the New menu are dependent on the
active item in the Well Explorer tree. Unavailable items are grayed out.

The New command provides a submenu with several options:


Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Event, Design, Attachment,
and Instant Design.

Attachment
You can attach any kind of file or shortcut to a file or folder created in
Windows® to the selected data item (Design, Case, Lesson, Component,
and so on) in the Well Explorer tree. Attachments are displayed in the
Associated Data Viewer with a paperclip icon ( ). Double-click or
right-click and select Open from the drop-down menu to launch
attachments in their native application.

You can attach Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, pictures (GIF,


TIFF, JPG, PowerPoint, and so on), folders, or other file types with a
recognized extension to most Well Explorer nodes. For example, if a
Site is selected in the Well Explorer, a map of the Rigsite can be attached
in JPG format.

Attachments may be stored in the database as a link, or as a copy to a


disk file. Folders are always stored as a link, opened in Windows, and
displayed as a folder icon ( ) in the Associated Data Viewer.

To create a new Attachment:


Select the Well Explorer node that will contain the attachment. Follow
the menu path:

File > New > Attachment

Alternatively, right-click the selected data item in the Well Explorer or


anywhere in the Associated Data Viewer and select New Attachment
from the drop-down menu.

3-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Attachment Properties dialog box opens, where you can attach
either a single file or a folder to the Well Explorer node. Use the
following procedures:
• Single File Attachment
By default, the File Attachment radio button is selected for single
file attachment.

Enter the path and file name in the File Attachment field, or click the
Browse button to navigate to the location of the Attachment. If
needed, enter additional information about the file attachment in the
Description field. This text will appear in the Details column of the
Associated Data Viewer.

Activate the check box to save the attachment as a link. Linked


attachments cannot be exported with the Save As command.
Click Apply to save and continue adding data in the dialog box.
Clicking Cancel will abort creation of the attachment. To complete
the attachment operation, click OK.

The new file Attachment icon ( ) displays in the Associated Data


Viewer. Linked documents are represented with a paper clip that has
a small arrow in the lower left corner ( ).

• Folder Attachment
Folders are linked to EDM™ and cannot be exported with the Save
As command.

Select the Folder Attachment radio button.


Enter the path and folder name in the Folder Attachment field, or
click the Browse button to navigate to the location of the folder. If
needed, enter additional information about the folder in the
Description field. This text will appear in the Details column of the
Associated Data Viewer.

Click Apply to save and continue adding data in the dialog box.
Clicking Cancel will abort creation of the attachment. To complete
the attachment operation, click OK.

The new folder Attachment icon ( ) displays in the Associated


Data Viewer.

For more information on how attachments are stored, see “Attachments


in the PROFILE™ Software” on page 3-69.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-5


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

New Instant Design

Use this command to access the Instant Design Properties dialog box.
This dialog box can be used to quickly create a new Design in the Well
Explorer tree.

This command provides a shortcut to create a new Design by providing


picklists to choose the appropriate Company, Project, and Site. The
Well, Wellbore, and Design names can then be entered. Once a Default
Datum Elevation, Ground Elevation, and Wellhead Elevation are
entered, the Design can be opened by clicking OK.

Offshore and Subsea wells are also designated by check box selection
on the Instant Design dialog box. If the Well is Offshore, a Water Depth
(MSL to Mudline) must be entered. Likewise, a wellhead Depth must be
entered for Subsea wells.

Open
Use this menu command to open the selected Design. Planned or
Prototype Designs open displaying the entire Design data set. Actual
Designs, containing data entered through another Engineer’s Desktop
application, are opened to the last day of the last Event present in the
associated Well.

The Open command in the File menu is only available when a Design is
selected in the Well Explorer tree.

Close
Use this menu command to close the active Design.

The Close command in the File menu is only available when a Design is
open in the Well Designer/Wall Plot Composer.

Save
Use this menu command to save any changes that have been made to the
Design using the Well Designer or Wall Plot Composer.

The Save command in the File menu is only available when a Design is
open in the Well Designer/Wall Plot Composer.

3-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Reload
Use this menu command to reload data from the EDM database. This
command may be used if data has been changed in the OpenWells®
software and the user wishes to see the updates in the
PROFILE software.

The Reload command in the File menu is only available when a Design
is open in the Well Designer/Wall Plot Composer.

Alternatively, click the Reload icon ( ) on the Toolbar.

Save As
Use this menu command to save a copy of the current Design.

The Save As command in the File menu is only available when a


Prototype or Planned Design is open in the Well Designer/Wall Plot
Composer. This command is not available for Actual Designs.

When the command is selected, the Save Design As window appears.


Enter a New Design Name and click Save. The new Design appears as
a child of the Wellbore from which the initial Design was selected.

Import
The Import command is used to import data for the Well Explorer into
the EDM database using a Transfer File in XML format.

Important

EDM Data Transfer File (*.edm.xml and pre version 2003.14.0 historical *.xml)
imports are not supported from paths containing apostrophes or file names
containing apostrophes. Make sure that you do not use apostrophes in file names or
directory names.

Importing a Transfer File


To use the Import command, select the database node in the Well
Explorer and follow the menu path:

File > Import > Transfer File

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-7


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Import dialog box displays. Navigate to and select the .XML file to
be imported. Select the file type from the Files of type drop-down list,
then click Import.

An Importing: <File path and name> status dialog box displays. If the
data is a previous database version to that used by the running
application, a confirmation will appear informing you that a log will be
generated if any errors are encountered during the import operation. The
dialog box closes when the import is complete and the selected file
contents are added to the Well Explorer tree.

EDM™ Import Logic


EDM Data Transfer files are XML-format files that contain data for
import to and export from the EDM database. You can import and/or
export Transfer files at various EDM hierarchy levels.

What you can import/export depends on the hierarchical level at which


you are working and the active EDT™ application. For example, if you
are on the Catalog node, only *.cat.xml transfer files can be imported.
Also, a Contractor/Rig transfer file (*.rig.xml) cannot be imported into
the PROFILE software because it does not use the Contractor node.

Well Explorer identifies what the “expand point” is within the Transfer
File. Then, it determines what to delete and replace with the new
information. For example, if you were to import a Transfer File that has
the expand point set to CD_WELL, then the Well Explorer creates
everything above the Well level (if it does not already exist). Everything
at the Well level (or below the Well level) that matches the Well ID is
deleted and replaced with the data inserted from the Transfer File.

Every hierarchy item (Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design,


and Case) is assigned a “key” or “id” in your database. These keys are
used to determine if the data you are importing is already in your
database. The name of the hierarchy item is not used to determine if the
data is already in your database. Therefore, if you are importing a
Transfer File into a database that already has the Company, Project, Site,
Well, Wellbore, or Design you are importing, the import may not
overwrite existing data. The import procedure determines if the
hierarchical item exists in the receiving database by comparing the key,
not the actual name of the hierarchical item.

3-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

For example, assume you have a design in your database called “Long
Horizontal Stretch.” If you import a Transfer File created from another
database that contains the same Design, Long Horizontal Stretch, and
the names of the hierarchical items for the Design are exactly the same
as in your database, you will have two Designs named “Long Horizontal
Stretch” after the import, unless the keys were the same. The keys are
randomly generated, and it is virtually impossible to import a file with
the same keys. The only time this is likely to happen is if you originally
created the hierarchy in your database with a Transfer File from another
database. If so, the keys used in the other database would be used in
your database.

Locked data cannot be overwritten by the transfer file import process. If


locked data is detected, the import is aborted.

All Transfer File types applicable to the PROFILE software are listed
below with their corresponding file extensions:

EDM™ File Extensions


File Extension Description

xml Historical EDM Transfer File (pre 2003.14.0)

edm.xml EDM Transfer File (2003.14.0 and later releases)

cat.xml Catalog Transfer File

tub.xml Tubular Properties Transfer File

Other transfer file types, such as CasingSeat™ software Template


Transfer File (*.pdt.xml) are included in the Files of type drop-down
list, located on the Import dialog box, but are not applicable to the
PROFILE software.

A locked data item will not allow an import to overwrite its data. Data
items that have a tight group assigned will not allow the data to be
overwritten by a user who does not have access to that tight group.

Export
The Export command is used to export selected data from the Well
Explorer to a Transfer File in .XML format. Transfer Files have a
*.EDM.XML extension and are used to move EDM data from one
database instance to another. Historical Transfer Files (previous to
version 2003.14.0) have a *.XML extension.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-9


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Transfer Files can be created to include all of the data contained within
any Well Explorer node. The command is available for any data levels
below the Database node ( ) in the Well Explorer tree. For example,
Sites, Wells, Wellbores, and Designs can be exported.

The Export > Transfer File command is not available if a Design is


open in the tree hierarchy you are trying to export.

Exporting a Transfer File


To use the Export command, select the node in the Well Explorer tree to
be exported and follow the menu path:

File > Export > Transfer File

The Export window appears. Navigate to the location where the file will
be exported and rename the file in the File name field, if necessary. By
default, the PROFILE software uses the name of the selected Well
Explorer node for the export file name. Landmark® recommends that
the user place a prefix or suffix in the file name to indicate the Well
Explorer level from which the data was exported (for example:
W - Well, S - Site, P - Project, Wb - Wellbore, D - Design). Select the
file type from the Save as type drop-down list, then click Export.

An Export status dialog box displays. When the export is complete, the
status dialog box closes and a confirmation of the successful export
displays. Click OK.

Print
Use this menu command to print the basic schematic of the
selected Design.

The Print command in the File menu is only available when a Design is
selected in the Well Explorer tree and the Well Designer is open. This
basic printout contains the Design Name (along the top of the page), a
schematic, the date (lower left corner of page), and the version of the
PROFILE software (lower right corner of page).

To use the Print command, select and open the Design in the Well
Explorer tree. With the Well Designer tab selected, follow the
menu path:

File > Print

3-10 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Print window displays. Select the appropriate printer and options,
then click OK.

Alternatively, click the Print icon ( ) in the main toolbar to perform


this function.

Print Preview
Use this menu command to display a basic schematic of the
selected Design.

The Print Preview command in the File menu has the ability to display
two different previews.

If a Design is selected in the Well Explorer tree and the Well Designer
is open, the Print Preview command will open a new window that
contains the Design Name, a schematic, the date, and the version
number of the PROFILE software.

If the Design is open and the Wall Plot Composer tab is selected, the
Print Preview command will open a new window containing the active
Wall Plot.

Follow the menu path:

File > Print Preview

A Print Preview window displays. This window provides users with the
ability to print the preview, zoom in, zoom out, or close the window and
return to the PROFILE main screen.

Print Setup
Use this menu command to select a printer and make any change to
properties before printing.

To use the Print Setup command, select and open the design in the Well
Explorer tree. With a Well Designer or Wall Plot tab selected, follow the
menu path:

File > Print Setup

The Print Setup window displays. Select the appropriate printer and
options, then click OK.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-11


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Properties
The Properties command in the File menu is used to access the
Properties dialog box for the node selected in the Well Explorer. The
contents of the Properties dialog box is specific to the selected node
level in the EDM data hierarchy.

Exit
Use the Exit command to end the PROFILE session.

This command closes all active windows and associated windows (for
example, Well Designer/Wall Plot Composer), automatically saving
any changes made to the database during the session, and closing the
PROFILE software. When the application closes, a license is
immediately made available for another user if the PROFILE software
is shared over a network.

Edit
The Edit menu contains the following commands: Cut, Copy, Paste, and
Symbol Folders.

Cut
Use the Cut command to remove a selected item from the Wall
Plot Composer.

Copy
Use the Copy command to copy a selected item from the Wall Plot
Composer to the Windows Clipboard in preparation to paste it in another
location within the PROFILE software.

Paste
Use the Paste command to paste the item currently in the Windows
Clipboard to the selected location in the Wall Plot Composer.

3-12 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Symbol Folders
Use the Symbol Folders command to open the Symbol Folders dialog
box and define the location of system and user symbols on a local or
network drive.

View
There are several commands listed under the View menu: Toolbars,
Status Bar, Well Explorer, Tabs, Symbol Map, and Options.

The Status Bar, Toolbar, and Well Explorer commands enable the
user to turn the Status Bar, Toolbar, or Well Explorer pane on or off. For
more information on these commands, refer to PROFILE Help.

The Tabs, Symbol Map, and Options commands are only available
when the Well Designer or Wall Plot Composer is open. These
commands are discussed below.

Tabs
The Tabs menu contains a submenu with several choices: Add Wall Plot
Composer Tab, Rename, Delete, and Tab Properties.

Add Wall Plot Composer Tab


Follow the menu path:

View > Tabs > Add Wall Plot Composer Tab

Alternatively, click the Add Tab icon ( ) to add a Wall Plot


Composer tab.

Use this command to add a tab to the Wall Plot Composer. This
functionality allows the user to create multiple .WPC templates for
a Design.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-13


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Rename
Follow the menu path:

View > Tabs > Rename

Alternatively, click the Rename Tab icon ( ) to rename a Wall Plot


Composer tab.

Use this command to rename a tab in the Wall Plot Composer. This
menu item is only available when a Wall Plot Composer tab is selected.
Select the Rename menu item to access the Rename Tab dialog box.

The Rename Tab dialog box is used to edit the name of a tab in the Wall
Plot Composer. The field in the Rename Tab dialog box will contain the
current name of the tab when it first appears. The name is highlighted,
allowing the user to enter the new name without selecting the current
name in the field.

Delete
Use this command to delete the selected Wall Plot Composer tab. From
the main menu, follow the menu path:

View > Tabs > Delete

Alternatively, click the Delete Tab icon ( ) to remove a Wall Plot


Composer tab.

Tab Properties
Use this command to access the Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties
dialog box. From the main menu, follow the menu path:

View > Tabs > Tab Properties

Alternatively, click the Tab Properties icon ( ) to open the Wall Plot
Composer tab properties dialog box.

The Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties dialog box is used to change the
order of appearance for Wall Plot Composer tabs in the main screen. It
is also used to select templates for specific Wall Plots or a default
template for all new Wall Plots.

3-14 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Tab Layout Area

Select a tab from the Tab Layout area of the dialog box. The Move Up
arrow icon ( ) and Move Down arrow icon ( ) can be used to move
the selected tab up or down in the list, thus changing its order
of appearance.

Click the Add Row ( ) and Delete Row ( ) icons to add new tabs
for Wall Plots or delete a Wall Plot tab.

Tab Properties Area

When a tab is selected in the Tab Layout area, the Tab Properties fields
become available. Use the Name field to change the name of a tab. Click
the Browse button ( ) to select a new template for the wall plot in
the selected tab.

Default Area

Click the Browse button ( ) to select a new default template for


Wall Plots.

Symbol Map
Use this command to open a symbol mapping editor to assign a symbol
for each type of Wellhead, Downhole Assembly, or Hole Section
component. Symbols are used by the PROFILE software as pictorial
representations of components to construct a schematic drawing.

The Symbol Map in the PROFILE software can be displayed using this
command. To view the Symbol Mappings dialog box, follow the
menu path:

View > Symbol Map

Alternatively, click the Symbol Map icon ( ).

The Symbol Mappings dialog box displays.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-15


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

You can also change the current symbol map in use by the PROFILE
software on the fly with the Map field (located in Symbol Map toolbar).
The picklist can be used to select a different Symbol Map, if one
is available.

Symbol Map Toolbar

The following are the different areas of the Symbol Mapping dialog box:
Symbol Map, Mappings, Symbol Preview, and Mapped Symbols.

Symbol Map Area


The Symbol Map area allows you to select, save new changes to, and
delete symbol maps.

Mappings Area
The Mappings area of the dialog box allows you to select components
and view their description and symbol name.

• Use the tabs to select the type of assembly to map components.

• Use the picklist to select the section type.

When a component type is selected, all variations of that component and


the associated symbols display in the Mapped Symbols area. The
example below shows Casing Float Shoe selected from the Casing
String component type.

3-16 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

In the spreadsheet, the Code is an abbreviated version of the component


description created when the symbol mapping was created. Within the
EDM database, all assembly components are stored by the section type
code and component type code. The component descriptions seen in the
editor are not stored with the component data. Type identifies whether
the component is System Defined (Sys - shipped by Landmark) or
created by the user (User).

When a symbol is selected, a graphical representation of the selected


component symbol displays in the Symbol Preview area.

Symbol Preview Area


The Symbol Preview area displays symbol selected in the Mapping area
in two views (if applicable). The symbol description is displayed above
the Symbol Preview area.

When a symbol is used to cover alonger distance in a schematic (that is,


tubing), a symbol without a break is desirable. In this case, repeating
symbols are created. The tubing joints symbol is shown below in full
(solid) and cutaway views.

Tubing Joint(s) Symbol

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-17


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Tubing Joint(s) Repeating Symbol

Use the Previous and Next buttons to browse through the components
displayed in the Mappings area. The Previous and Next buttons only
display Non-default Symbol Maps.

The Symbol Color Selector allows you to change color of the symbols
in Non-default symbol maps. If the color has been changed, click the
Default button in the Color Selection Grid to return to the default color
for the symbol. Use the Custom button located at the bottom of the Color
Selection Grid to access an enhanced Color dialog box.

3-18 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Mapped Symbols Area


When a component is selected, all of the variations of that component
are listed in the Mapped Symbols area. Every component has a
default symbol.

Mapped Symbols Area

The default repeat symbol appears as “Default (Repeat)” in the filter list.
If a component does not have a default repeat symbol listed, one can be
created by clicking the Create New button with the Manufacturer and
Model No fields left blank.

Components can have different symbols depending on the manufacturer


and/or model of the assembly component. For Wellhead components,
size can also be used when selecting a symbol.

Note

The Delete Component button, located at the bottom of the Symbol Mappings
dialog box, is not available when the Symbol Mappings dialog box is accessed
through the Symbol Manager utility.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-19


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Options
Use this command to change the display colors and options for the Date
Bar, Event Bar, and Well Schematic.

To access the dialog box, follow the menu path:

View > Options

The Options dialog box opens to the Date Bar tab.

Date Bar Tab


Use the picklists to access color selection grids for each component in
the Event Bar (page 3-71) and Date Bar (page 3-71).

The Event Bar and Date Bar are located above the Well Designer and
Wall Plot Composer tabs when an Actual Design is open. They are not
present for Planned or Prototype Designs.

Once a color has been changed, the Apply button becomes available. To
view the new color scheme without closing the Options dialogbox, click
Apply. To save the color selections and return to the PROFILE main
window, click OK. To return to the PROFILE main window without
saving any color scheme changes, click Cancel.

Display Tab
Display options for the Well Schematic can be changed on the
Display tab.

Image Quality
The image quality settings control the smoothness of symbols that
appear on the schematic.

Higher quality equates to more points needed to draw the symbol.


Higher quality schematics will also take longer to generate due to the
increased amount of information.

Screen is the quality of the on-screen image as seen in the Well


Designer window.

Printer is the quality of the image when printed, print previewed, or


when drawn on a Wall Plot page.

3-20 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Lighting
The lighting settings allow further control over schematic appearance.

Brightness is the brightness of the light that illuminates the image.

Position is the direction from which the light is shining. This controls
where the specular highlight, or bright spot, appears on the symbols. The
default setting is just left of center.

Symbol Width
The symbol width settings control how big the symbols will appear on
the schematic.

Schematic controls the width of the symbols that make up


the schematic.

Note

The PROFILE software will try to prevent symbols from becoming squashed
or distorted when drawn. Making the symbols wider will also make them
longer. Longer symbols will mean that less can be drawn before the PROFILE
software will have to start squashing them to make them fit.

Wellhead controls the size of the wellhead as it appears on top of the


schematic. This does not have any effect on the size of the wellhead
when viewed using the 2D or 3D wellhead view.

Maximum Image Width


The maximum image width settings control the width of the schematic
window on the Design View. This prevents the schematic window
expanding too far and pushing the spreadsheets too far to the right to
be usable.

Schematic controls the maximum width of theschematic window when


viewing the normal, vertical schematic.

Wellhead controls the maximum width of the schematic window when


viewing the multi-lateral or wellhead views.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-21


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Colors
The colors settings assign colors to the open hole and cement areas of
the schematic.

Open Hole specifies the color to use for the open hole on the schematic.

Cement specifies the color to use for the cement drawn in


the schematic.

Good contrast between the Open Hole color and the Cement color is
required to be able to distinguish between them when printed on a black
and white printer.

Custom Cutaway Angle


Use the slider control to adjust the custom cutaway. To fine tune the
cutaway angle, click the slider, then use the left and right arrows on your
keyboard to move it.

Once changes have been made, the Apply button becomes available. To
view the new color scheme without closing the Options dialogbox, click
Apply. To save the changes and return to the PROFILE main window,
click OK. To return to the PROFILE main window without saving
changes, click Cancel.

Well Designer
The following commands areavailable in the Well Designer menu: New
Design Wizard, Auto Catalog Select, Filter Data by Date, Data Quality,
Auto Data Quality, Track Labels, and Schematic Detail.

For more information on the Well Designer menu options, see the Well
Designer chapter of this manual (see “The Well Designer” on page 4-1).

Composer
The Composer menu items are only available when the Wall Plot
Composer is open.

For more information on the Composer menu options, see the Wall Plot
Composer chapter of this manual (see “The Wall Plot Composer” on
page 5-1).

3-22 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Tools
The Tools menu item in the PROFILE main menu bar contains
commands that enable the user to find data items on the Well Explorer
and access the Unit System and Symbol Manager dialog boxes.

There are three commands available in the Tools menu: Unit System,
Find, and Symbol Manager.

Unit System
Use the Unit Systems Editor to modify or delete an existing display unit
set or create a new unit set based on one that already exists.

To use the Unit System command, follow the menu path:

Tools > Unit System

The Unit Systems Editor opens.

For more information about the Unit System Editor, click the Help
button in the Unit System Editor window to access Unit System Editor
Online Help.

Find
Use the Find command to perform a simple search of business objects
on the Well Explorer tree. The Find command opens the Find in Tree
dialog box in simple search mode. Advanced search methods are
discussed later in this section.

To use the Find command, follow the menu path:

Tools > Find

Alternatively, click the Find icon ( ) or press Ctrl+F.

The Find in Tree dialog box opens.

Simple Find
The Find in Tree dialog box allows you to perform a quick and simple
search for one string (alpha-numeric and special characters) of the Well
Explorer tree. The simple search steps through the data hierarchy of the
Well Explorer and searches the names of all nodes.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-23


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Advanced Find
Click the Advanced Find button located on the Find in Tree dialog box
to expand the dialog box and perform advanced searches of the Well
Explorer. Well Explorer node filtering is also available on this dialog
box and discussed on page 3-28.

Well Explorer Advanced Find offers several types of search operators


for queries of the database. Advanced searches can be saved for future
use and sent to others for use with CasingSeat, StressCheck™,
OpenWells, COMPASS™, Well Cost™, and WELLPLAN™ software.
Advanced Find also provides a mechanism to translate searches into
filters that are saved on the local machine for later use.

Open the Find in Tree dialog box and click the Advanced Find button to
expand the Find in Tree dialog box.

Select the item type for the search from the Search for picklist (for
example, Wellbore).

Perform an advanced search with one or both of the following methods,


which are discussed in detail below:

• Field Criteria Tab

• SQL Criteria Tab

Note

The Field Criteria and SQL Criteria tabs can be used either exclusively or in
combination with one another.

Using the Field Criteria tab

The Field Criteria tab is used to improve the results of a search by


defining the attributes of selected criteria. This tab contains two areas:
the Well Explorer nodes list and the attributes table. The procedure
below is an example of how to run an advanced search with field criteria.

Define Wellbore search by Company

From the Search for picklist, select Wellbore. Next, expand the
Company node to define the Wellbore search. When the Company node
is expanded, a list of the Company attributes display.

3-24 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Select the check box next to the Company attribute by which the
Wellbore search will be defined.

For example, the following attribute check boxes may be selected:


Company, Create Date, Locked, Reporting Time, Update, and User.
For each attribute selected, a row appears in the attributes table to the
right of the Well Explorer nodes list. Each row defines the specifics of
the attribute selected by defining the Operator and Value fields.

The following Operator choices are available:

Search Operators
Operator Description

=Equal o t

<> Not equal to

Contains Contains any character group in the


name of the selected attribute

Contains Word Contains the word

Starts with Starts with the string value entered

Ends with Ends with the string value entered

> Greater than

< Less han t

>= Greater than or equal to

<= Less than or equal to

Is Null Field is not populated

Is Not Null Field is populated

Note

The format of the Value field is dependent on the Data Entry Type of the
attribute selected.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-25


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Define Wellbore Search by Well

Now that you have a basic understanding of how the Advanced Find in
Tree dialog box works, you will perform a real query on the Well
Explorer. From the Find in Tree (Advanced Find) dialog box, expand
the Well node in the Well Explorer nodes list to display a list of the
Well attributes.

Select the check box next to the Well attribute by which the Wellbore
search will be defined. For example, select the Common Well Name
attribute check box. This attribute is added to the attributes in the table
on the right.

Once the search is complete, the results display in a table below the
Field Criteria tab, as seen below.

Operator and Attribute


Search Values

Search Results

Advanced Search Query

If there are no results for the search, the results area displays the
message, “The search found no items matching the criteria.” If results
are found, the results table lists all Wellbores that match the defined set
of criteria.

3-26 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Click a result in the results table and notice this highlights the selected
node in the Well Explorer tree located behind the Find in Tree
dialog box.

EDM Database
icon (filtered)

This action will not close the Find in Tree window. You can then view
the properties of the node in the application and then return to the Find
in Tree window to continue with the current search or define a
new search.

To better see how the Well Explorer is stepped through, select Design
in the Search for picklist and click Find Now. Click each result row to
step from Design to Design in the Well Explorer.

When a search is complete, click Close or press Alt+F4 to close the Find
in Tree dialog box. Click No when prompted to save the filter.

Using the SQL Tab


The SQL Criteria tab is used to narrow down the results of a search by
defining custom SQL From and Where clauses. The following example
finds all Designs within a MSDE database that contain a Cost Estimate
and AFE Report approved in November of 1996:

Open the Find in Tree dialog box and switch to Advanced Find mode.
Verify that no attribute(s) are selected in the Field Criteria tab, then
select the SQL Criteria tab.

From the Search for picklist, select Design.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-27


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

In the From field, enter:

DM_AFE

In the Where field, enter the following lines, separated by the AND
operand, then click Find Now to execute a search:

DM_AFE.date_approval >= {d '1996-11-01'}

AND

DM_AFE.date_approval <= {d '1996-11-30'}

When the search is complete, results display in a table below the SQL
Criteria tab. If there are no results for the search, the results area will
display the message, “The search found no items matching the criteria.”
If results are returned, the results table lists all Designs that match the
defined criteria.

Click a result in the results table. This highlights the selected node in the
Well Explorer tree located behind the Find in Tree window. This action
will not close the Find in Tree window. The user can then view the
properties of the node in the application and then return to the Find in
Tree window to continue with the current search or define a new search.

For example, click the row “Long Horizontal Stretch” in the results list
to highlight in the main application Well Explorer tree.

Click Simple Find, located at the bottom of the Advanced Find in Tree
dialog box, to return to the simple search dialog box. Otherwise, when a
search is complete, click Close or press Alt+F4 to close the Find in Tree
dialog box.

Filtering
Filtering is the application of a predefined search to the Well Explorer
tree to exclude all items not specified by the filter criteria. Apply custom
filters to the Well Explorer tree via the Advanced Find dialog box and
display only the items that meet specific constraints, which are specified
when you create the filter. Save filters for future use, which are easily
accessed via the Filter picklist. The Filter picklist is located directly
above the Well Explorer tree in the main application window. Filters can
be added to the Filter drop-down picklist and then applied to the Well
Explorer tree. When a filter is applied, a funnel icon ( ) appears over
the Database node.

3-28 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Well Explorer ships with two predefined filters, located in the
\Documents and Settings\<InstallUserID>\Application
Data\Landmark\OpenWells\Queries\Drilling folder:

• COMPASS Designs - SQL query that displays any Design with


data specific to the COMPASS software

• WELLPLAN Cases - SQL query that displays any Design that has
an associated WELLPLAN Case

Filtering is especially useful when dealing with large numbers of wells


and designs. In the example below, a manager wishes to display only
wells and designs with activity after the 5th of January, 2006.

Example of Filter Criteria in Advanced Find in Tree Dialog Box

By applying a filter to show Wells and Designs with the Update Date
greater than one week previous to the current date (in this case
5/7/2006), the manager can filter out all Wells and Designsthat have not
changed. Only Wells and Designs with changes in the last week will
display in the Well Explorer.

Previously, in “Define Wellbore Search by Well” on page 3-26, you


searched for a Wellbore located under a Well with ‘GZ’ in the Common
Well Name field. Now you will save this search as a reusable query that
filters the Well Explorer.

Saving Filters

Open the Advanced Find dialog box and create the same Field Criteria
search that was created in “Define Wellbore Search by Well” on page 3-
26.

From the Find in Tree dialog box, select File > Save Filter. The Save
dialog box displays. Navigate to a local or network drive location where
you want to save the query and click Save. By default, all queries are
saved in the \Documents and Settings\<InstallUserID>\Application
Data\Landmark\OpenWells\Queries\Drilling folder. Query files are
saved with a .QRY file extension.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-29


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Alternatively, the program will prompt you to save the search when you
click either Apply to Tree or Close.

Save prompted
when pressed
File menu
commands in Find
in Tree dialog box

Saving a Filter

Once saved, .QRY files can be:

• selected in the Well Explorer Filter picklist and immediately


applied to the tree,

• opened in the Advanced Find dialog box for edit, or

• shared with other EDT users, such as sending the query to a


colleague via e-mail.

Removing Filters

To delete queries and remove the filter from the Well Explorer, open the
folder through Windows where the *.QRY file is located and delete
the file.

3-30 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Symbol Manager
The Symbol Manager utility is used to create and manage Wellbore
equipment and operations symbols used by the PROFILE software.

Use the Symbol Manager command to launch the utility.

The symbols are stored in small .PSY files, which are organized using
the Symbol Map. Symbol files are stored in the EDT/PROFILE/
Symbols folder in the EDT install directory.

Follow the menu path:

Tools > Symbol Manager

The Symbol Manager utility is launched and the Symbol Manager


window opens.

For more information about the Symbol Manager utility, see “Symbol
Manager” on page 6-1.

Window
The Window menu items are only available when the Well Designer or
Wall Plot Composer is open. The following commands are available:
Cascade, Tile, and Arrange Icons. For more information on the Window
menu items, refer to the application’s online Help.

The Window menu item also displays the current Design (viewed in the
Well Designer or Wall Plot Composer) and any other Designs that are
also open (but not displayed). The check mark beside the Design name
indicates that it is the currently active Design. See the example below:

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-31


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Help
The Help menu in the PROFILE main menu bar contains commands
that allow the user to access the application online help information,
release notes, and EDM licensing and version information. For more
information on the PROFILE online help system, see “PROFILE™
Software Online Help” on page 2-14.

Toolbars
There are several toolbars available in the PROFILE software: the Main
Toolbar, Reference Datum Toolbar, Symbol Map Toolbar,
Schematic Objects Toolbar, and the Wall Plot Composer Toolbars.
The Main Toolbar is discussed below.

For more information on the Reference Datum Toolbar, see “Reference


Datum Toolbar” on page 4-3.

For more information on the Symbol Map Toolbar, see “Symbol Map
Toolbar” on page 4-4.

For more information on the Schematic Objects Toolbar, see


“Schematic Objects Toolbar” on page 4-4.

For more information on the Toolbars available in the Wall Plot


Composer, see “Wall Plot Composer Toolbar” on page 5-11, “Object
Toolbar” on page 5-13, and “Layout Toolbar” on page 5-15.

Toolbars contain icons that can be used to quickly perform common


functions, including file management.

Note

Toolbar buttons are greyed out if they are not applicable to the user’s current action.
A tooltip will appear when the mouse is hovered over a toolbar icon.

3-32 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Main Toolbar
The table below shows the buttons available in the PROFILE
Main Toolbar:

PROFILE™ Software Main Toolbar Icons


Toolbar Icon Function

Instant Design

Open

Save

Reload from Database (refresh Design)

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Well Explorer Display

Find

Print

Symbol Map

Symbol Manager

Add Wall Plot Composer Tab

Delete Wall Plot Composer Tab

Rename Wall Plot Composer Tab

Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties

Help

Instant Design
The Instant Design icon ( ) is used to access the Instant Design
Properties dialog box. This dialog box can be used to quickly create a
new Design in the Well Explorer tree.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-33


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

This command provides a shortcut to create a new Design by providing


picklists to choose the appropriate Company, Project, and Site. The
Well, Wellbore, and Design names can then be entered. Once a Default
Datum Elevation, Ground Elevation, and Wellhead Elevation have
been defined, the Design can be opened by clicking OK.

Offshore and Subsea wells are also designated by check box selection
on the Instant Design dialog box. If the Well is Offshore, a Water Depth
(MSL to Mudline) must be entered. Likewise, a Wellhead Depth must
be entered for Subsea wells.

Open
Click the Open icon ( ) to open the selected Design. Planned or
Prototype Designs are opened and display the entire Design data set.
Actual Designs containing operations information entered through the
OpenWells software are opened to the last day of the last Event defined
for the associated Well.

Reload
Click the Reload icon ( ) to reload design data from the EDM
database. This command may be used if data has been changed in the
OpenWells software or another application and the user wishes to see
the updates in the PROFILE software.

Save
Click the Save icon ( ) to save any changes that have been made to
the Design using the Well Designer or Wall Plot Composer.

Undo
Click the Undo icon ( ) to undo the most recent actions made in the
Wall Plot Composer.

Redo
Click the Redo icon ( ) to redo actions that were undone using the
Undo icon.

3-34 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Cut
Click the Cut icon ( ) to remove the selected item and place it on the
Windows Clipboard.

For more information on the Cut command, see the PROFILE


online Help.

Copy
Click the Copy icon ( ) to place a copy of the selected item on the
Windows Clipboard.

For more information on the Copy command, see the PROFILE


online Help.

Paste
Click the Paste icon ( ) to insert the contents of the Windows
Clipboard to the location currently selected. In order for this function to
be effective, you must have cut or copied (saved) data to the
Windows Clipboard.

For more information on the Paste command, see the PROFILE


online Help.

Well Explorer
Click the Well Explorer icon ( ) to hide or display the Well Explorer
in the PROFILE main window. When working with a Design, it is often
very useful to hide the Well Explorer, thus providing more room on the
screen to display the Well Design or Wall Plot Composer.

Find
Click the Find icon ( ) to perform a simple search of business objects
on the Well Explorer tree. The Find command opens the Find in Tree
dialog box in simple search mode.

If advanced find and/or filtering is needed, click the Advanced Find


button. For more information about searching the Well Explorer tree,
see “Find” on page 3-23

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-35


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Print
Click the Print icon ( ) to print a basic downhole equipment
schematic of the selected Design.

The Print icon is only available when a Design is selected in the Well
Explorer tree and the Well Designer is open. This basic printout contains
the Design Name (along the top of the page), a schematic, and the date
(in the lower right corner of the page).

To use the Print icon, select and open the Design in the Well Explorer
tree and, with the Well Designer tab selected, click the Print icon ( ).

The Print window appears. Select the appropriate printer and options,
then click OK.

Symbol Map
Click the Symbol Map icon ( ) to display the Symbol Mappings
dialog box.

For more information on the Symbol Mappings, see “Symbol


Mappings” on page 6-74.

Symbol Manager
Click the Symbol Manager icon ( ) to access the Symbol Manager
Utility. The Symbol Manager utility is used to create and manage the
Wellbore equipment and operations symbols used by the PROFILE
software. The symbols, stored in small .PSY files, are organized using
the Symbol Map.

Online help for Symbol Manager is available from within the utility.

Add Tab
Click the Add Tab icon ( ) to add a Wall Plot Composer tab to the
Design. This functionality allows the user to create and save more than
one Wall Plot for a Design.

Delete Tab
Click the Delete Tab icon ( ) to delete the selected Wall Plot
Composer tab.

3-36 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Rename Tab
Click the Rename Tab icon ( ) to rename a tab in the Wall Plot
Composer. This menu item is only available when a Wall Plot
Composer tab is selected. Click the Rename Tab icon to access the
Rename Tab dialog box.

The Rename Tab dialog box is used to edit the name for a tab in the Wall
Plot Composer. The field in the Rename Tab dialog box will contain the
current name of the tab when it first appears. The name is highlighted,
allowing the user to enter the new name without selecting the current
name in the field.

Tab Properties
Click the Tab Properties icon ( ) to access the Wall Plot Composer
Tab Properties dialog box.

The Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties dialog box is used to change the
order of appearance for Wall Plot Composer tabs in the main screen. It
is also used to select templates for specific Wall Plots or a default
template for all new Wall Plots.

Tab Layout Area

Select a tab from the Tab Layout area of the dialog box. The arrow
buttons can be used to move the selected tab up or down in the list, thus
changing its order of appearance.

Click the Insert Row ( ) and Delete Row ( ) icons to add or delete
a Wall Plot tab.

Tab Properties Area

When a tab is selected in the Tab Layout area, the Tab Properties fields
become available. Use the Name field to change the name of a tab. Click
the Browse button ( ) to select a new template for the Wall Plot in
the selected tab.

Default Area

Click the Browse button ( ) to select a new default template for


Wall Plots.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-37


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

PROFILE™ Software Help


Click the Help icon ( ) to access the introductory page to the
PROFILE online help.

For more information on the PROFILE online help system, see


“PROFILE™ Software Online Help” on page 2-14.

Well Explorer
The Well Explorer is the primary navigation and data management
interface common to all EDM applications. This interface is consistent
with the Engineer’s Desktop software and also provides file Attachment
support for all Well Explorer nodes.

The Well Explorer forms the foundation for the Engineer’s Desktop
software. It has been designed to provide intuitive, consistent navigation
and data management throughout the EDM data hierarchy. Use the Well
Explorer to browse the database and open, copy, delete, rename, and
manage the main data hierarchy levels, including Companies, Projects,
Sites, Wells, Wellbores, Events, and Designs.

3-38 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Well Explorer is located by default on the left-hand side of the


PROFILE window and operates in the same way as Microsoft®
Windows Explorer. It is organized as a hierarchical data tree that can be
used to browse the EDM database.

Filter
Shows currently
selected filter Recent Bar
shows last
(notice “funnel” selected data
indicating a filter items; use to
is applied to this quickly open
node recently viewed
items
Hierarchal
Available Tubular “Tree”
Properties

Available Catalogs Attachment


Indicator
shows that
Associated attachment(s)
Data Viewer exist for the
selected Design
Components
“associated with”
the selected data a document
item (the Design linked to the
in this example) selected
Well Design as an
Configuration “attached
document”
Shows the
current Well
configuration for Reference
the selected Datum
Design, including shows the
sidetracks for current
complex reference
wellbores datum
elevation
for the
selected
Design

Well Explorer in the PROFILE Software

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-39


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Operating the Well Explorer


Use the left mouse button to expand or collapse branches of the data tree
and to select nodes within the data tree.

The right mouse button has a context-sensitive menu. Depending on the


hierarchical level you have selected (Company, Project, Site, Well, and
so on) the menu will populate with relevant options. Most of these
options can be found in the Main Menu Bar. The right-click menu for
each node is described in the nodes’ help topic.

The Well Explorer supports drag-and-drop functionality between


hierarchical levels. For example, you can select a Project associated
with one Company and copy it to another Company. If you copy a
Project from one Company to another, all children of the source Project
will copy into the other Company.

To refresh the Well Explorer, press F5.

General Functions in the Well Explorer

Drag-and-drop
Drag-and-drop in the Well Explorer functions somewhat like the
Microsoft Windows Explorer. This functionality can be used to copy
and paste a Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, or Design.

All Drag-and-drop operations copy the data; data is never deleted or


moved from its original location.

To copy a specific Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, or Design from one


Company to another, expand the appropriate node for each of the data
sets. Select the information to be copied and drag it to the new location.
A copy of the item will appear in the new location.

Copy-paste Functionality

Note

Just selecting any of the nodes does not make the Edit menu active unless a Design
is open.

3-40 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Select the specific Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, or Design and follow
the menu path:

Edit > Copy

Select the node where the copy of thespecific Project, Site, Well, Event,
or Wellbore is to be placed and follow the menu path:

Edit > Paste

Shortcut Methods

Press Ctrl+C to copy and Ctrl+V to paste.

Click the Copy ( ) and Paste ( ) icons in the toolbar.

Renaming a Node
Nodes in the Well Explorer can be renamed using their Properties
dialog box.

Note

If a node is locked, the rename feature is not available. For more information on
data locking, see “Data Locking” on page 3-42.

To rename a node, right-click it and select Rename from the menu that
appears. The node name appearing in the Well Explorer becomes
editable. Enter the new name for the node. Alternatively, you can select
the node and press F2, or double-click the node (with a slight delay
between each click) and type the new name directly into the
Well Explorer.

Note

The new text entered will replace the previous text in the Properties dialog box for
the selected node.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-41


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Data Locking
Data Locking is available to protect data within the database. Data is
commonly locked if it is static or if the responsible engineer wants to
prevent other users from making changes. Users can be prevented from
making changes by locking data at any EDM data hierarchy level. Users
can only open the data item in read-only mode; to keep changes, use
Save As or Export.

Passwords can be configured at the Company level to further prevent


unauthorized changes to data. By default, no passwords are set, and the
locked check box on all Properties dialog boxes can be toggled on and
off at will with no security to protect data integrity. The locking of data
in the PROFILE software is applied to the EDM database and therefore
will be applicable to any other EDM applications using the database and
accessing that data. Data locking is performed from within Properties
dialog boxes.

You can lock Company properties only, or you can lock properties for
all levels below Company (Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, Case,
Contractor, and Tubular Properties).

In the Well Explorer, if a data item is locked, a small lock appears in the
corner of its icon, as seen on this locked Prototype Design icon ( ).
When you open a locked data item, you will see the message “This
Design is locked and therefore Read-Only.” Changes to this Design will
not be saved to the database. To keep your changes, use the Save As or
Export options.

Locking data in the database can provide another level of security


outside of the user and group security management through the creation
of tight groups (see “Tight Groups” on page 1-8).

How Data Locking Works


There are a number of ways that Data Locking can be implemented.

The Company Properties (see “Company” on page 3-46) can be locked,


allowing users to have edit access to all nodes below the Company level
without allowing edit access to the Company node. All nodes below the
Company level (Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, and so on) can also be
locked separately with a data password allowing read-only access to the
data contained within the locked nodes.

3-42 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

To lock data, passwords must be set in the Company Properties dialog


box to restrict unlocking. If a password is not set, data objects can be
unlocked by any user wanting to change data in a locked node. A user
must enter the password to unlock a locked node.

By default, no passwords are set for new Companies, and the Locked
check boxes on all Properties dialog boxes are available to all users. The
Locked check box can be activated or deactivated at will with no
security to prevent users from modifying the data.

If an item is locked, a small lock appears in the corner of its icon in the
Well Explorer, as seen in this locked Well icon ( ).

Entering Passwords
The Company Properties dialog box contains two password buttons:
Company Level and Locked Data, and a Company is locked
check box.

Company Properties Dialog Box

The Company is locked check box is used to lock data at the Company
level. The passwords are used to set a Company Level password for the

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-43


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Company and the Locked Data button is used to protect the child data
sets owned by the Company within the hierarchy.

Note

All levels are locked individually, which means that locks do not cascade.
Therefore, a Well can be locked without locking all of the data below the Well in
the hierarchy.

If passwords are not set for data, then it is available to all users to make
changes. The Company Level button and the Locked Data button work
independently of each other for the purposes of data locking.

The Company Level button is used to set a password to protect the data
at this level only. It does not impact the accessibility of any data below
the Company in the hierarchy.

The Locked Data button is used to enter a password that must be used
to unlock any data that is locked using the check box below the
Company level in the hierarchy. Data is unlocked using the Locked
check box in each Properties dialog box.

Unlocking Data Protected by a Password


Open the nodes’ Properties dialog box.

Deselect the Locked check box.

A dialog box displays and prompts for a password.

Do one of the following:

• If you are unlocking a Company, enter the Company


Level password.

• If you are unlocking a node below the Company, enter the


Locked Data password.

Click OK.

The data at the node can now be edited or deleted.

3-44 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Locking Data Levels Below the Company Level


To lock a node (that is, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Event, and Design)
and its data below the Company level, define the Locked Data
Password in the Company Properties dialog box, General tab (see
“General Tab” on page 3-46).

Click the Locked Data button. The Change Data Locked Password
dialog box displays.

Enter the password in the New password and Confirm password fields
and click OK.

This password will then be required if a user wants to unlock node


properties and make changes. The password protection is applied to all
nodes below the Company node in the Well Explorer tree (see
“Company” on page 3-46).

To lock a Data Node, open the Properties dialog box once the password
has been set.

Well Explorer Nodes


The Well Explorer contains a number of node levels to organize Well
data following common operation organization. Each of these node
levels contains properties that define that level.

Properties
The Properties dialog boxes arrange and group information on various
data items within the Well Explorer.

To view a specific Properties dialog box, select the node from within the
Well Explorer and follow the menu path:

File > Properties

Note

Alternatively, select the node and press Alt+Enter or right-click the node and select
Properties from the drop-down menu to access the Properties dialog box for a
selected Well Explorer node.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-45


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Database
The Database is the highest level in the Well Explorer hierarchy and
stores all Company data sets and supporting tables.

Database Properties
The Properties dialog box at the Database level is used to set default
logo behavior for printed reports and define which bitmaps to use for
various lithology names. This dialog box contains two tabs:

• Report Logo Setup - Define a User logo and specify default logo
positioning for Report Manager printed reports.

• Lithology Editor - Open the Lithology Editor to specify which


bitmaps to use for particular lithology names. These bitmaps are
then used to draw lithologies in stratigraphic formation columns for
schematics and section views.

Company
Company is the second highest data level in the hierarchy, beneath
Database. The Company node stores all field or asset data owned or
operated by the Company. A single Company may be present to manage
all Projects. Some users may choose to create multiple Companies to
report different business units by region in countries in which the
Operator operates.

Company Properties
The Company Properties dialog box is used to manage a set of Projects.

General Tab
In the Details area, enter the name of the Company. This name uniquely
identifies the company within the Well Explorer.

Use the Division and Group fields to enter names for the Division and
Group, if applicable. This information can be used for
reporting purposes.

Use the Contact area to enter contact information (for example:


Company representative name, address, and telephone number).

3-46 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Additionally, you can select an image (for example: bitmap, jpeg, gif
image formats) to represent the Company that will be displayed on
Report Manager printed reports. To associate a logo with the Company,
click Select and navigate to the location of the image. To remove the
logo, click Delete.

Select the Company is locked check box to lock the data for the
Company. For more information on Data Locking, see “How Data
Locking Works” on page 3-42.

Note

When a Company node is locked, Attachments cannot be added to the Company;


however, Projects can still be created under that Company.

Audit Info Tab


The Audit Info tab is present on each of the Properties dialog boxes. Use
this tab to track modifications to the data item. Although the Audit Info
tab is used on each of the Properties dialog boxes, the contents of each
Audit Info tab is separate and unique. For example, the Company
Properties > Audit Info tab is separate from the Project Properties >
Audit Info tab.

The Last updated by area of the Audit Info tab displays information
about the last user to modify the data in that node, the application they
used to modify the data, and the date the data was last modified.

The Created by area of the Audit Info tab displays information about
the user that created the node. It displays the application that was used
to create the node (for example: Data Transfer Tool, OpenWells, and so
on). It also displays the date that the node was created.

Finally, there is a Notes area to enter comments as required to assist with


tracking changes to the node data. New comments may be appended to
existing comments.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-47


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Project
The Project is the data level directly beneath Company. Each Project
within a Company must have a unique name. A Project can be thought
of as a field or asset. A Project has one system datum (mean sea level,
lowest astronomical tide, and so on) that is used to define zero true
vertical depth elevation for the Project. Within the Project, Wellbores
can be referenced to the Project level system datum or to additional rig
depth reference elevations specified at the Well level. A Project may
contain one or more Sites.

Project Properties
This properties dialog box provides information regarding the creation
and modification of the Project.

General Tab
In the Details area, enter a name that uniquely identifies this Project in
the Project field. This name will appear in the Well Explorer.

Enter a short statement identifying the project in the Description field.

Use the Security area to set Tight Group security. This is the security
designation for this project, based on the current user’s access rights.
UNRESTRICTED is the default. Be careful—if you restrict this field,
certain users will not be able to view this Project. Tight groups are
created in the EDM Administration Utility through the EDM Security
plug-in. They are assigned in the Well Explorer at the Project, Site, or
Well level.

Use the System Datum Description area to select the System Datum
from the drop-down list or enter a new datum. The system datum
describes absolute zero height or depth for the Project, and is the depth
from which all Wellbore depths are measured. If you select Mean Sea
Level, the Elevation field below is grayed out.

3-48 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Elevation value indicates where the System Datum is relative to


Mean Sea Level. The elevation field needs to be specified according to
the system datum named by the user. EDT applications allow elevation
to be positive or negative regardless of the system datum name (except
Mean Sea Level), so the user has the flexibility to represent onshore
and/or offshore scenarios above and below MSL. For example, if you
selected Lowest Astronomical Tide, even though the elevation fields
allow you to enter a positive or negative elevation value, the proper
elevation value must be negative because of the meaning of LAT.
Another example is if the user enters a system datum name as High
Astronomical Tide, the expected elevation value must be positive.

Select the Project is locked check box to lock the data for the Project.
For more information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the Company
Level” on page 3-45.

Audit Info Tab


The Audit Info Tab shows who created and last updated the data. For
information on the Audit Info Tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

Site
A Site is a location defined within the Project’s Geodetic system. Site is
the data level directly beneath the Project level. Each Site within a
Project must have a unique name. A Site is a collection of one or more
Wells that are all referenced from a local coordinate system centered on
the Site location. A Site can be a single land Well, an offshore subsea
Well, a group of Wells drilled from an onshore pad, or a group of Wells
drilled from an offshore platform.

Site Properties

General Tab
In the Details area, enter a name that uniquely identifies the Site in the
Site field. The Site name is displayed in the Well Explorer. The Site
name should refer to the location, not the drilling rig. (This is because
rigs are mobile; place names are not.)

Enter a District for the Site, where appropriate.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-49


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Block field can be used to enter additional information about


the Site.

Enter a value in the Default Site Elevation field for the Site, measured
from the System Datum. This value is used to generate a default datum
when a new Well is created below that Site.

Use the picklist to select the Tight Group Name. Tight Groups are
defined and assigned to users in the EDM Security plug-in of the EDM
Administration Utility. If a user is not a member of the Tight Group
assigned to the Site, then the Site and its Wells will not be visible to the
user in the Well Explorer tree.

In the Azimuth Reference area, select either the True or Grid option for
the North Reference. The Site’s local coordinate system may be aligned
to either True or Grid North. The North Axis of all the Sites in the
Project will be aligned to either True North or Grid North and all survey
azimuths should be corrected accordingly. In a True North system, the
azimuths and coordinates will be rotated by the convergence angle from
the grid lines on the map.

Select the Site is locked check box to lock the data for the Site. For more
information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the Company Level” on
page 3-45.

Location Tab
The Location tab of the Site Properties is used to define the Site location.

Enter the Lease Name, County, State/Province, and Country


where appropriate.

Audit Info Tab


The Audit Info Tab shows who created and last updated the data. For
information on the Audit Info tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

3-50 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Well
The Well is the data level directly beneath the Site level. Each Well
within a Site must have a unique name. A Well is simply a surface
location with a position relative to the Site location. A well can have one
or more Wellbores associated with it. For example, there may be the
original Wellbore with one or more Sidetracks tied on to the parent bore
or its Sidetracks at different kick-off depths. Multi-lateral Wells may
have Wellbores tied to other Wellbores, which are tied to
subsequent Wellbores.

Well Properties
The Well Properties dialog box is used to enter the Well’s offset location
from the Site center, as well as other naming information.

General Tab
Details Area

Enter the Well (Common) name. The Common name is an abbreviated


well name, usually associated with the Legal well name used by the
Company to identify the Well for day-to-day reference. Enter the Well
(Legal) name issued by the regulatory agency for the area. Enter a
Description for the well.

Enter, edit, or view a short description of the location (geographic


description of the Well location) in the Location String field.

Unique Well Identifier Area

Enter the Unique Well Identifier in the UWI field. The Unique Well
Identifier is a coded Well name based on the location of the Well. The
identification system and codes vary from region to region.

From the picklist, select the Type of UWI.

Enter the API Well Number in the Well No field. The API Number is
comprised of 10 digits for a Well, 12 digits for a Wellbore, and 14 digits
for a Completion.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-51


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Security Area

Use the picklist to select the Tight Group. Tight Groups are defined and
assigned to Groups and Users in the EDM Security area of the EDM
Administration Utility. If a user/group is not a member of the Tight
Group assigned to the Well, then the Well will not be visible in the Well
Explorer tree.

Active Unit System Area

Use the picklist to select the default display unit set for the well.

This is the default display unit system for the Well data set. When a Well
or one of its Wellbores is opened, the display unit system will
automatically change to the Default Display Unit System selected in this
picklist. This unit set name is displayed in the PROFILE status bar.
Leave the unit selection as Undefined to use the user’s default unit set
when opening data for the Well.

For more information on unit systems in the PROFILE software, see


“Unit System” on page 3-23

Hazards Present Area

Select hazard check boxes to flag wells that require additional


monitoring associated with health, safety, and environment issues. The
hazards check boxes are used for informational purposes only and have
no input to engineering analysis. Wells that contain high amounts of
non-hydrocarbon gases, like carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide, are a
major concern in Well operations. Surface and subsea wells that involve
low specific activity (LSA) scale or sludge require special handling
according to applicable regulatory requirements.

H2S

Select this check box to indicate if H2S is present in the Well.

LSA

Select this check box to indicate if LSA (Low Specific Activity)


material is present. Low Specific Activity materials are Class 7
(radioactive) materials with limited specific activity satisfying
certain limits.

3-52 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

CO2

Select this check box to indicate if CO2 is present in the Well.

Locked Check Box Area

Select the Well is locked check box to lock the data for the Well. For
more information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the Company
Level” on page 3-45.

Depth Reference Tab


Use the Depth Reference tab of the Well Properties dialog box to define
Reference Datum Level elevations relative to the System Datum
specified in the General tab of the Project Properties dialog box (see
page 3-48). One or more Depth Reference Datums (local datums) can
be defined.

The Reference Datum Levels (RDL) is the reference elevation for


depths “displayed” or entered in EDM applications. It is sometimes
known as the local datum, and is measured as an elevation relative to the
System Datum. For each RDL, the elevation above or below the System
Datum must be specified. A positive elevation level represents a height
above the system datum, while a negative elevation level represents a
position below the system datum.

When the Depth Reference tab is opened, a new row appears in


the spreadsheet.

Enter the name of the new Reference Datum Level in the Datum field.

When the Default check box is selected, it indicates that this is the
default datum to be used for new Designs under the Well. Designs that
already have a datum associated will not change by specifying a new
default datum.

When no datums are checked, the business logic for new designs uses
the datum which has the most recent date, based on the date field in the
Depth Reference tab of the Well Properties dialog box.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-53


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Enter the Elevation above (positive) or below (negative) the


System Datum.

Notes

• If a Design is associated with this datum, the elevation cannot be edited.


• A grayed out Elevation cell in the spreadsheet indicates that a datum is in use
somewhere in the Design and cannot be edited or deleted.

Enter, edit, or view the name of the Contractor and Rig.

Enter, edit, or view the Description of the datum (for example:


Production Datum, Drilling Datum, and so on).

Enter the Date the datum was created. The program uses the date field
to determine which is the newest datum, then uses that datum as the
default for new Wellbores.

Configuration Area

Land Well

If the Well is a land Well, enter the value for the Ground Elevation
above the System Datum (must be a positive number). Leave the
Offshore check box deactivated.

Offshore Well

If the Well is an offshore Well:

• Activate the Offshore check box to indicate it is an offshore Well.


• Enter the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the vertical depth
of the column of water at the Well.
• Enter the Wellhead Elevation (positive value above the
System Datum).

3-54 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Subsea Offshore Well

If the Well is an offshore Subsea Well:

• Activate the Offshore check box.


• Activate the Subsea check box (Offshore check box must be
activated before this option becomes available).
• Enter the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the vertical depth
of the column of water at the Well.
• Enter the Wellhead Depth (positive below the System Datum
specified on the General tab (Project Properties)).

Summary Area

In the Summary area, a graphic depicts the selected configuration (land,


offshore, or offshore subsea), and displays current values. The following
values are calculated and/or displayed: Datum, Datum Elevation, and
Air Gap.

Datum

This is the default datum selected in the Well Properties dialog box (on
the Depth Reference tab in the spreadsheet above the Summary area).

Datum Elevation

This is the elevation of the default datum above the System Datum.

Air Gap

Air Gap measured to MSL/GL is calculated and displayed. Air Gap is


the distance from ground level/sea level to the rig floor, and is used in
some calculations for hydrostatic head. Air Gap is always a positive
value. The application calculates Air Gap as follows:

• (Air Gap, offshore wells) = Datum Elevation - Elevation (of the


System Datum relative to Mean Sea Level).

• (Air Gap, land wells) = Datum Elevation - Ground Elevation


(relative to the System Datum).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-55


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

System Datum Elevation is set in the Project Properties/General dialog


box. Ground Elevation is set in the Well Properties/ Depth Reference
dialog box. Datum Elevation is the elevation for the Depth Reference
Datum (local datum). Datum Elevation can be positive or negative. If
you change the datum selection, the Air Gap updates automatically.

Note

In the CasingSeat and StressCheck software, if you change the datum and it causes
a negative air gap to be calculated, a warning message will appear and inform you
that you cannot select this datum.

Entering improper values for the system datum elevation, datum


elevation, and ground elevation (if applicable) will result in a negative
air gap calculation.

The calculation of a negative air gap flags the user that the relationship
between the system elevation, datum elevation, and ground elevation (if
applicable) may be incorrect, and needs to be reviewed and modified in
order to produce a positive air gap.

Note

In certain areas with land Well locations below MSL, negative air gap is valid.

Mudline Depth (MSL)

(Offshore only) Displays the distance from MSL to the sea bed, which
is Water Depth - Elevation (System Datum offset from MSL, which is
set in the Project Properties dialog box).

Mudline TVD

(Offshore only) Displays the distance from the Depth Reference Datum
to the sea bed (Datum Elevation + Water Depth).

To Create a Datum
The spreadsheet in the Depth Reference tab of the Well Properties
dialog box allows for the creation of new datums. To create a new
datum, place the cursor in the empty Datum cell in the last row (a blank
row) of the spreadsheet. Enter a name for the datum and complete the
remaining fields in the row.

3-56 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Once a new datum has been created, a new blank row will appear at the
bottom of the spreadsheet. Another new datum can be added in this
blank row.

To Delete a Datum
To delete a datum in the Depth Reference tab of the Well Properties
dialog box, place your cursor on the row number and select the row.
Press the Del key.

Note

Only datums not assigned to a Design can be deleted. This action is not reversible.

Audit Info Tab


Shows who created and last updated the data. For information on the
Audit Info Tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

Wellbore
The Wellbore is the data level directly beneath the Well and each
Wellbore within a Well must have a unique name. A Wellbore describes
the path of a Well from a top depth to a bottom depth, which may be a
planned or unplanned sidetrack, or a lateral in a multi-lateral
completion. The original hole must also be represented as a Wellbore. A
Wellbore may start from surface—an “Original Hole”. A Wellbore may
also start some distance along an existing Wellbore—a “Sidetrack” tie
to a kick-off point.

Wellbore Properties

General Tab
Enter the Common Name that will be used to identify the Wellbore.
This name must be unique within the Well.

Enter the Legal Name that will be used to identify the Wellbore. This
name must be unique within the Well.

Enter a Bottomhole Location for the Wellbore (if known).

Enter the ST No for the Wellbore.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-57


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

If the Wellbore is a sidetrack, select the parent Wellbore that contains


the tie-on point from the Parent Wellbore picklist. Select the TAML
Class (optional and for informational purposes only).

TAML Class applies to sidetracks and laterals junctions that are tied to
a parent Wellbore.

TAML Classifications
Level Description

1 Open/Unsupported Junction—Barefoot main bore & lateral or slotted


liner hung off in either bore.

2 Main bore Cased & Cemented, Lateral Open—Lateral either barefoot


or with slotted liner hung off in open hole.

3 Main bore Cased & Cemented, Lateral Cased but Not Cemented—
Lateral liner anchored to main bore but not cemented at junction.

4 Main bore & Lateral Cased & Cemented—Both bores cemented at


the junction.

5 Pressure Integrity at the Junction—Achieved with the completion, that


is, straddle packers (may or may not be cemented).

6 Pressure Integrity at the Junction—Achieved with sealed casing


(cement alone is not sufficient). Includes reformable junctions and
non-reformable, full-diameter splitters that require larger
diameter wellbores.

Select the Kickoff Date and enter the Kickoff MD (optional and for
informational purposes only).

Select the Wellbore is locked check box to lock the data for the
Wellbore. For more information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the
Company Level” on page 3-45.

Audit Info Tab


Shows who created and last updated the data. For information on the
Audit Info tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

3-58 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Change History Tab


Changes made to EDM Well data display within the Change History tab.
Change History provides historical audit information related to
Wellbores and Designs in the associated Properties dialog boxes. The
Change History is populated by Engineer’s Desktop applications
whenever additions, deletions, or modifications to Design-entered data
are made. Specifically, changes are recorded when a user adds to,
updates, deletes, and copies data within EDM.

Note

Use the ChangeHistoryLogging systems setting in the EDM Administration Utility


to enable or disable the recording of Change History. See EDM Administration
Utility Help for details.

Event
An Event is a major operation occurring on the Well that changes its
downhole configuration or records monitoring activity.

An Event is defined as a time slice or period marking a phase of major


operations occurring at a Well. A new Event must be created when the
focus of work activity on the Well changes. Every Well normally
contains multiple Events, as required. Each Event represents a particular
job performed on the Well. Concurrent or overlapping Events are not
supported. Within the PROFILE software, Events are displayed in the
Date Bar when an Actual Design is open to enable the Design to be
viewed historically.

An Event is a data level directly beneath the Well level in the Well
Explorer hierarchy used primarily to group OpenWells Reports. Each
Event within a Well is defined by the Event Code (Reactivate, Repair,
Workover, and so on) and the Objective (Completion, Development,
Wildcat, and so on) The date that follows an Event name in the Well
Explorer helps to further define the Event.

Event Types

Events Displayed in Date Bar (Actual Design Only)

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-59


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Event Properties
The Event Properties dialog box is used to specify a block of time during
which major phases of operations occur in the Well. Events do not
normally overlap, when one Event ends, the next Event may begin. The
Event is below the Well level in the hierarchy and on the same level
as Wellbore.

General Tab
The General tab of the Event Properties dialog box records the
parameters of an Event such as the event type, objective, start and end
dates, event status, and costs.

Note

To close the Event permanently, you must populate the End Date field in the Dates
area and select an option from the End Status drop-down picklist

Details Area

Use the Details area to record the reasons and estimated time for
the Event.

Select the Event Code from the picklist to define the Operation type (for
example, ODR is the code for ORIG DRILLING).

When the Event Code is specified, the PROFILE software automatically


populates the Event field with the Event Type. The Event Type
describes the operation occurring on the Well.

Select the Event’s Objective from thedrop-down picklist. The objective


represents the overall goal of the event. Examples of objectives are
Development, Re-entry, Completion, and Exploration.

If the Event has an alternative objective, enter it in the Objective 2 field.

Enter the estimated number of days the event will occur in the Est
Days field.

Enter any Team information.

Select the type of equipmentneeded for the Event from the Equip. Type
picklist (for example, DRILLING RIG).

3-60 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Dates Area

Use the Dates area to record the current status of the Event. For most
date fields in the PROFILE software, you can either manually enter the
dates or select the down arrow to open a date picker.

The Start Date marks the actual start of the Event operation on the Well.
The End Date marks the closure of the Event operation on the Well.

The End Status defines the current condition of the Well operation’s
Event (for example, ASSESSMENT, COMPLETE, EVALUATION,
and so on).

The Date Off Production field marks the starting point for temporary
suspension of Well production.

The Date On Production field defines when the Well has been brought
back on to production.

Costs Area

Use the Costs area to record the authorized and estimated costs of
the Event.

Enter the estimated authorized cost of the Event in the Auth Cost field.

Enter the date the authorized cost is approved in the Auth Date field.

Enter the last estimated cost for the Event in the Last Est field.

Enter the date the last cost estimate was made in the Est Date field.

Enter the Currency of the costs listed in this area. This currency will be
the primary currency for all costs recorded in the Event.

Enter an exchange rate, if applicable, in the Exch Rate field.

Select the Locked check box to lock the data for the Event. For more
information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the Company Level” on
page 3-45.

Audit Info Tab


Shows who created and last updated the data. For information on the
Audit Info tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-61


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Design
Design is the data level directly beneath the Wellbore. Each Design
within a Wellbore must have a unique name. A Design is a planned or
actual configuration of a Wellbore. A Design can be thought of as a
design phase and is categorized as Prototype, Planned, or Actual. The
Design icon shown in the Well Explorer indicates the category:

Icon Type of Design


Prototype

Planned

Actual

A Wellbore can have several Designs specified. Only one Design within
a Wellbore may be an Actual Design. Only one Design within a
Wellbore may be a Planned Design. A Wellbore can have any number
of Prototype Designs. The Actual Design is typically created in the
OpenWells software and supports historical data entry and visualization
through Events. Planned and Prototype Designs represent a different
version of the planned Wellbore configuration and do not support
historical visualization.

To Open a Design
Select the Design from the Well Explorer tree and follow the menu path:

File > Open

Alternatively, select the Design and double-click to open it in the Well


Designer tab of the PROFILE software or right-click the Design and
select Open from the drop-down list.

Design Properties
The Design Properties dialog box is used to create a new Design and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the Design.

3-62 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

General Tab
Use this tab to specify a unique name that identifies the Design, and to
provide additional information related to the Design. This tab is also
used to lock the Design and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the Design. A Design
name is required. Additional information on this dialog box is used for
informational and reporting purposes and is not required.

Note

If the Design is locked, you can open it but cannot save it back to the database. You
can use Save As to save it as another Design for editing.

Details Area

In the Design field, enter the name that will be used to identify the
Design. The name must be unique.

Enter the version of the Design in the Version field.

Select the Phase of the Design from the drop-down list box (Prototype,
Planned, or Actual). If there is no Design associated with the Wellbore,
all three choices will be available in the Phase picklist. The list of
phases that appear in the picklist is filtered; there can only be oneDesign
marked as Planned and one marked as Actual. The Planned or Actual
option is removed from the picklist if another Design for the same
Wellbore already has it set. You can have as many Prototype (default
setting for phase) Designs as desired.

Enter the Effective Date or select the down arrow to use the data picker.
Use the arrow buttons on the date picker to move to the desired month,
then click the day. The date selected will populate the field.

Depth Reference Information Area

Select the Depth Reference datum to be used for Planned and Prototype
Designs from the picklist of Depth Reference datums that were defined
at the Well level. This picklist is read-only for Prototype Designs. All
other fields are display-only or calculated.

Datum Elevation

Read-only display of the elevation entered for the selected Depth


Reference datum (set in Well Properties dialog box, see “Depth
Reference Tab” on page 3-53).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-63


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Air Gap (MSL) or (Ground)

Air Gap is calculated from MSL and displayed. Air Gap is the distance
from ground level/sea level to the rig floor, and is used in some
calculations for hydrostatic head. The application calculates Air Gap
as follows:

• (Air Gap, offshore wells) = Datum Elevation - Elevation (of the


System Datum relative to Mean Sea Level).
• (Air Gap, land wells) = Datum Elevation - Ground Level (relative
to MSL).

Elevation and Ground Level are set in the Well Properties/ Depth
Reference dialog box. Datum Elevation is the elevation for the Depth
Reference Datum. Datum Elevation is always positive. If the datum
selection is changed, the Air Gap updates automatically.

Notes

• Elevation and Ground Level are set in the Well Properties/ Depth Reference
dialog box. Datum Elevation is the elevation for the Depth Reference Datum.
Datum Elevation is always positive. If you change the datum selection, the Air
Gap updates automatically.
• If the datum is changed, resulting in the calculation of a negative air gap, a
warning message will appear to inform the user that the datum cannot
be selected.

System Datum (Ground Elevation or Mean Sea Level)

Displays the current System Datum for the onshore (Ground Elevation)
or offshore (Mean Sea Level) Well.

Mudline Depth (MSL)

(Offshore only) Displays the distance from MSL to the sea bed, which
is Water Depth - Elevation (System Datum offset from MSL), which is
set in the Project Properties dialog box.

Mudline TVD

(Offshore only) Displays the distance from the Depth Reference Datum
to the sea bed (Datum Elevation + Water Depth).

Select the Design is locked check box to lock the data for the Design.
For more information, see “Locking Data Levels Below the Company
Level” on page 3-45.

3-64 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Audit Info Tab


Shows who created and last updated the data. For information on the
Audit Info tab, see “Audit Info Tab” on page 3-47.

Change History Tab


For information on the Change History tab, see “Change History Tab”
on page 3-59

Associated Data Viewer


The Associated Data Viewer is located directly below the Well Explorer
in the PROFILE main window. It displays different information
depending on the node selected in the Well Explorer.

When an Event, Well, or Wellbore is selected, the Associated Data


Viewer displays all OpenWells Reports associated with that Event,
Well, or Wellbore.

Wellbore selected
in Well Explorer

OpenWells Reports
listed in Associated
Data Viewer

Events Associated with a Wellbore

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-65


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

When a Design is selected in the Well Explorer, the Associated Data


Viewer displays the following information:

• Lessons Learned (if lessons exist)


• Definitive Wellpath (Survey) Information
• Pore Pressure Summary Information
• Fracture Gradient Summary Information
• Geothermal Gradient Information
• Wall Plot Composer Template (Tab) names
• Attachments (if attachments exist)

Associated Design Data

Attachments are electronic files or folders that may be attached to any


node within the Well Explorer. Attached files have a paper clip icon
( ) preceding them in the Associated Data Viewer. Attached folders
have a folder icon ( ) preceding them in the Associated Data Viewer.

Files or folders can be attached to a selected data item (Site, Project,


Well, Event, and so on) in the Well Explorer tree. Attached files and
folders associated with the selected data item display in the Associated
Data Viewer. Attached files can be launched in their native applications
by double-clicking on them. Any file type can be attached to a node in
the Well Explorer using the Associated Data Viewer (for example:
documents, spreadsheets, or graphic files). A filethat is unrecognized by
Windows cannot be opened using the Associated Data Viewer. If a file
unrecognized by Windows is attached and a user tries to open it,
Windows will not be able to respond, as it will not know which
application to use. Attached folders open with Windows to display the
contents of the folder.

3-66 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

File attachments can be stored directly in the EDM database, or as a link


to a file located on the user’s hard drive or on the network. Folder
attachments are always stored as a link.

Note

File attachments stored in the database cannot be saved back to the database using
the file application (for example, Word). The user must save documents to disk and
then re-import the files as an attachment.

Lessons Learned can be attached to the Well and Design level of the
Well Explorer. Lessons Learned allow a Company to record operations
experience and capture project related knowledge for later reference.
This information can be used to improve Well designs and operations
for future Wells.

Lessons Learned may also be integrated with other Knowledge


Management systems using the CD_LESSONS_LEARNED table
within the EDM database. Lessons have a book icon ( ) preceding
them in the Associated Data Viewer.

Lessons Learned in the PROFILE™ Software


Benefits to using Lessons Learned include:

• Users in the field who have first-hand knowledge and experience


with both processes and equipments used on the Rig can document
their expertise to the rest of the organization.

• Lessons Learned data entry areas enable users to easily enter this
valuable information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-67


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

• Lessons Learned data entry areas provide fields to enter


information for equipment, processes, methods and vendors.

• Lessons Learned information can be associated to activity code


information. This information can then be used during the Well
planning phase for future Well designs to improve operations.

• Permutations of lessons information can easily be configured for


comparisons and reporting purposes.

Note

Lessons Learned can be queried using EDM Data Analyzer™ software. See EDM
Data Analyzer Help for details.

A Lesson can be created from the Well and Design levels in the Well
Explorer tree. Lessons are also created from within a Report Data Entry
form Window in the OpenWells software. Lessons are associated to the
Well and the Report.

To create a new Lesson:

From the Well Explorer, right-click the Well or Design icon and select
New Lesson to display the Lesson Properties dialog box.

Enter information as required in each tab. If data is unavailable at the


time of creation, enter the data as it becomes available by updating the
Lesson Properties dialog box. From the Audit tab, enter Audit Notes if
needed. The Audit tab purpose and use is the same as the Audit Info tab,
which is discussed on see page 3-47.

If desired, click the Attachments icon ( ) to add or delete


attachments associated with the Lesson. For details about creating
attachments, see “Creating Attachments” on page 3-69.

Click Apply to save and continue adding data in the dialog box or OK
to save and close the dialog box. Cancel will abort creation of
the Lesson.

The new Lesson icon ( ) displays in the Associated Data Viewer


when the Well or Design is selected.

3-68 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Attachments in the PROFILE™ Software


An attachment in the PROFILE software can be any type of file, folder,
shortcut, or URL created in Windows. For example, a spreadsheet
containing information on activities at a particular Well can be attached
to the Well in the PROFILE software. This will allow the PROFILE
users to expand on the information stored by the PROFILE software and
other Engineer’s Desktop applications.

Attachments can be added to any node within the Well Explorer tree, as
well as to Lessons Learned. When a Well Explorer node is selected, its
attachments are displayed in the Associated Data Viewer and are stored
in the database, or as a link. Attachments to Lessons Learned display in
the Lesson Properties dialog box and not the Associated Data Viewer.

Creating Attachments
To create a new attachment, click a Well Explorer node and select:

File > New > Attachment

Alternatively, right-click a Well Explorer node and select the New


Attachment menu option.

An Attachment Properties dialog box displays with radio buttons to


choose either a file or folder attachment.

File Attachment
By default, the File Attachment radio button is selected for single
file attachment.

Enter the path and file name in the File Attachment field, or use the
Browse button to navigate to the location of the Attachment. If needed,
enter additional information about the file attachment in the Description
field. This text will appear in the Details column of the Associated
Data Viewer.

Activate the check box to save the attachment as a link. Linked


attachments cannot be exported with the Save As command.

Folder Attachment
Folders are linked to EDM and cannot be exported with the Save As
command.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-69


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Select the Folder Attachment radio button.

Enter the path and folder name in the Folder Attachment field, or use the
Browse button to navigate to the location of the folder. If needed, enter
additional information about the folder in the Description field. This
description text will appear in the Details column of the Associated
Data Viewer.

Once the file or folder is selected, click Apply to save and continue
adding data in the dialog box or OK to save and close the dialog box.
Clicking Cancel will abort creation of the attachment.

The new Attachment icon ( ) displays in the Associated Data Viewer.


Linked files or folders are represented with a paper clip that has a small
arrow in the lower left corner ( or ).

How Attachments are Stored


Attachments are stored in the database and are accessible to all users,
unless stored as a link to a local file path. When stored as a link, the
attachment can only be accessed by users whose contact to the
attachment is not limited by their access to the machine or network
access. Folder attachments are linked and not stored in the database.
Landmark recommends use of UNC file paths to avoid problems with
inconsistently mapped network drives.

Attachments stored in the database cannot be directly edited. When a


change is made to the attachment, it is stored locally and must be
re-added to the database and either it must be renamed or the existing
attachment must be replaced.

Attachments stored as a link (linked files and all folder attachments) can
be edited by any user with access to the original document through
the link.

Well Designer
The tabs located within the Well Designer enable the user to add or edit
Wellbore equipment, Wellhead, and operations information.

With a Design open, users may view, create, or update planned,


prototype, or actual Wellbore operations information.

3-70 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

For more information on the Well Designer, see “The Well Designer”
on page 4-1.

Wall Plot Composer


The Wall Plot Composer is used to customize the design of hard copy
plot layouts to be viewed on screen or printed on any number of printers
or plotters.

For more information about the Wall Plot Composer see “The Wall Plot
Composer” on page 5-1.

Event Bar
The Event Bar in the PROFILE software allows the user to select a date
for a Well Design/Wall Plot based on a specific Event and Date for a
Well. To display the Event Bar, double-click an Actual Design to open
the Well Designer.

This is an example of the Event Bar:

Event Bar

The Event Bar lists all of the Events present for the current Well. They
are displayed historically from left to right.

Note

The Event Bar displays only when an Actual Design is open.

Date Bar
The Date Bar appears when an Actual Design is open and is located
directly below the Event Bar. The Date Bar uses a calendar-like display,
which allows the user to select a date within the selected Event on which
to display active Wellbore equipment and Well operations data.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-71


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

The Date Bar displays in both the Well Designer and Wall Plot
Composer views. The Date Bar shows symbols on days when
OpenWells reports are entered.

Note

The Date Bar will not appear when a Prototype or Planned Design is open. For more
information, see“Design Properties” on page 3-62.

This is an example of the Date Bar:

Date Bar

Moving Around the Date Bar


The arrows located on either side of the month allow the user to browse
through the available months for the current Event.

Use this icon to move to the beginning of the Event.

Use this icon to navigate back through the days related to the Event.

Use this icon to navigate ahead through the days related to


the Event.

Use this icon to move to the end of the selected Event.

The alternating light and dark gray squares located below the months
represent the days of the month. Dates appear on the 1st, 15th, and last
day of each month.

Symbols appearing on the Date Bar depict available OpenWells report


data for that day. You can open the associated OpenWells Output
Report(s) using the right-click menu available for the date cell.

Date Bar Symbols


The following OpenWells Report symbols may appear below the
months in the Date Bar on the days where Reports have been entered.
Each symbol represents a different type of OpenWells report. The

3-72 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

PROFILE software uses the data entered in these reports to


create schematics.

Icon OpenWells Report

Cost Estimate and AFE Report

Daily Operations Report (this icon takes precedence over other icons on
the same date)

Casing Report

Cementing Report

Wellbore Equipment Report

Stimulation Report

Perforation Report

Wellhead Report

Fluid Hauling

Any Other OpenWells Report

Attachments for the selected date

Hover over any icon to view details for the available report.

Any Daily Operations Report icon ( ) that includes a + sign has more
than one report present on that date. Hover over the icon to view a list of
all reports for that particular day.

Date with Multiple Reports

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-73


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

On the Date Bar, the start and end dates of an Event are indicated by a
gray cross (X) over dates that are outside the Event. These dates cannot
be selected.

Start and End Dates Shown in Date Bar

Time Control for the Date Bar


A Time Control field is available to specify a time within a reporting
period available below the Date Bar. By default, when a day is selected,
the PROFILE software shows data and schematic information for the
end of the reporting period.

This functionality enables the user to define a snapshot in time and see
a schematic featuring a BHA or other operation that may be performed
in the hole during the Report interval. You may enter a value in the Time
Control field, which corresponds to when the BHA was in the hole and
selects the Report from the Date Bar.

The Time Control field is located above the Date Bar. The time format
displayed in the Time Control field is based on the Regional Settings for
the computer (that is, if the clock on your computer is set as a 24-hour
clock in the Regional Settings, then the Time Control field will display
a 24-hour clock.)

Date Bar Time Control

To use the Time Control field, highlight the hours, minutes, or seconds
and enter a new time. Alternatively, use the up and down arrow buttons
to change the time.

3-74 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Report Icon Right-click Menu


A right-click menu is available from within the Date Bar of the Well
Designer (see “Well Designer” on page 3-70). The options available
within this menu allow the user to add, open, and view details for
attachments, as well as the ability to open OpenWells reports using the
EDM Report Manager.

Note

The EDM Report Manager provided with the EDM Engineering 2003.16.1.0
applications is a separate application used to view, print, save, and send Output
Reports configured with the EDM Administration Utility and is available in the
OpenWells and COMPASS applications.

For more information on the EDM Report Manager, refer to the Utilities
help system.

Right-click a report and a menu appears. The following options


are available: New Attachment, Open Attachments, Attachments, and
Open Reports.

New Attachment
Use this option to add a new attachment to the selected date. The
Attachment Properties dialog box appears.

Open Attachments
This option will appear grayed out unless an attachment or attachments
are available. If an attachment is available, an Attachment icon ( ) will
display in a Date Bar cell. From the cascading menu, select Open
Attachments to view the available attachments.

Opening an Attachment from the Date Bar

Select the attachment to open it.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-75


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Attachments
Select this option to open the Attachments dialog box in order to attach
files or folders to the Design. All attachment types are symbolized by
small paper clips in the Date Bar ( ).

For more information, see “Attachments in the PROFILE™ Software”


on page 3-69.

Open Reports
Select this option to view a list of the available reports and open an
Output Report in the EDM Report Manager. This allows you the ability
to print an OpenWells report from the PROFILE software.

Opening an OpenWells Report in the PROFILE Software

Select a report to display the available Output Reports. Selecting an


output report will launch the EDM Report Manager, which displays the
selected Report.

Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the main application window
and can be hidden or displayed with the Status Bar command in the
View menu. It is present to provide the user with a quick reference for
the current Display Unit Set, active Depth Reference Elevation for the
Design, Viewing Date for the Actual Designs, and Display Status of the
EDM Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM).

PROFILE Status Bar

In the example above, the

• green SAM icon ( ), located to the far left, indicates the SAM
server is configured and working properly,

3-76 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

• Wall Plot Composer icon ( ) shows the currently loaded Wall


Plot template

• Active Date icon ( ) shows the currently selected date in the Date
Bar. If the date does not display, then no active date is selected on
the Actual Design or a Design that is not actual is open.

• Elevation icon ( ) and elevation figures display a datum elevation


(RKB) of 85 ft above system elevation,

• unit system shows that API is currently in use,

• the blue SAM icon ( ), located to the far right, indicates the
username of the person currently logged into the application, and

• “edm” is the active user.

Information displayed in the Status Bar is discussed in detail below.

Current Activity
The current activity is located on the far left side of the Status Bar (not
shown in the figure above). It will display the application activity (for
example, Loading or Ready).

SAM Indicator

In the example above the SAM Indicator is a green SAM icon. The SAM
icon appears in the application Status Bar as follows:

Icon Description
A green SAM icon in the Status Bar indicates that the Messenger
Service is active and the application has successfully connected.
A green SAM icon with an red X on it indicates that the
Messenger Service is not currently active.
No icon When no icon appears in the application status bar, the
Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not been configured for the
EDM database instance for the current user.
A red “Dead SAM” icon displays when the SAM Server is
unavailable (server down or connection lost).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-77


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Wall Plot Composer Template Name


This area of the Status Bar displays the name of the current template
used for the Wall Plot Composer. In the example above, the template is
Default.ppc. For more information on templates, see “Templates in the
Wall Plot Composer” on page 5-2.

Date
The date of the Design displayed in the Well Designer or Wall Plot
Composer. In the example above, the date is 2/1/2000.

Depth Reference Datum


The Depth Reference Datum ( ) is the reference elevation for depths
displayed or entered in EDM applications. It is sometimes known as the
local datum, and is measured as an elevation relative to the System
Datum. You can define one or more Depth Reference Datums for a Well
in the Depth Reference tab of the Well Properties dialog box (see
“Depth Reference Tab” on page 3-53). For each Depth Reference
Datum, the elevation above or below the System Datum must be
specified. A positive reference level represents a height above the
system datum; a negative elevation level represents a position below the
system datum.

Display Unit System


The EDM Unit Management System is shipped with three default
display unit systems: API (American Petroleum Institute), SI
(International System of Units), and API-US Survey Feet. In the
example above, the display unit system is API. For more information,
see “Unit Systems” on page 1-7.

Current User
The blue user icon ( ), located to the far right of the Status Bar,
indicates the username of the person currently logged into the
application. In the example above, user “edm” is logged into the
PROFILE software.

3-78 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

Summary

In this chapter, the intricacies of navigating in the PROFILE software


were discussed in detail. All components of the PROFILE main screen
were covered.

Menu commands, toolbars, and shortcuts were described for the


main screen.

Additional information on unit systems, datums, and data locking were


included in this chapter.

While navigating through the PROFILE software, the application’s


Online Help is a useful tool to learn more about the features and
functionality of the software.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 3-79


Chapter 3: Navigating in the PROFILE™ Software

3-80 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4
The Well Designer
The Well Designer in the PROFILE™ software can be used to view, create, or update planned or
actual Wellbore equipment and Design operations information. The Well Designer contains a
number of tabs that group the data and simplify access to that information. The tabs allow the user
to display, create, or edit drilling data including Wellbore trajectory, hole section, casing,
drillstring/BHA, and cementing information as well as the Completion data including Wellbore
equipment, stimulation, Wellbore openings, rod strings, and wellhead.

The Well Designer has its own live schematic diagram. This schematic provides a dynamic
representation of the downhole equipment configuration for the Planned or Prototype Design or
data selected in an Actual Design. The schematic can also display Wellheads in 2D and 3D. The
live schematic is automatically updated when changes are made in the Well Designer or when the
user changes display data in an Actual Design.

The New Design Wizard feature allows the user to quickly build a Wellbore Design that includes
hole section, casing, and cementing information for single Wellbore and dual completions.

The Well Designer is also equipped with a feature called Drag-and-drop string editing. This
feature can be used to quickly build a Drillstring or Completion String assembly for a Wellbore
where the hole sections, casing, and cementing information is already in place.

The fluent interface of the Well Designer coupled with the ability to immediately view changes
made in the live schematic allow the user to effortlessly manipulate data in the
PROFILE environment.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-1


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Well Designer Components

Located on the right side of the main screen, the Well Designer contains
the following components (seen in the diagram below): Event Bar, Date
Bar, Reference Datum Toolbar, Symbol Map Toolbar, Schematic
Object Toolbar, Live Schematic, Trajectory tab, Hole Section tab,
Drillstring/BHA tab, Casing tab, Cementing tab, Wellbore Equipment
tab, Rod Strings, Wellbore Openings tab, Stimulations tab, and
Wellheads tab. Each of these components is discussed in more detail
within this chapter of the PROFILE training manual.

Symbol Map Selector

Event Bar

Date Bar

Schematic
Objects
Toolbar

Reference
Datum
Selector
Toolbar

Live
Schematic

Well
Designer
Tabs

Status Bar

Components in the Well Designer

4-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Event Bar
The Event Bar in the PROFILE software allows the user to select a date
for a Well Design based on a specific Event and Date for a Well. The
Date Bar (described below) is used in conjunction with the Event Bar to
select a specific data set.

The Event Bar lists all of the Events operated for the current Well. They
are displayed historically from left to right.

Note

The Event Bar displays only when an Actual Design is open.

Date Bar
The Date Bar appears when an Actual Design is open. The Date Bar
displays Events historically and allows the user to select a date within
the selected Event on which to display active Wellbore equipment and
Well operations data.

Note

The Date Bar displays only when an Actual Design is open.

For more information on moving around the Date Bar, Date Bar
Symbols, Time Control for the Date Bar, and Right-click menus, see
“Date Bar” on page 3-71.

Reference Datum Toolbar


Use this picklist to change the depth reference elevation for
the schematic.

Reference Datum Toolbar

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-3


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Symbol Map Toolbar


Use this picklist to change the Symbol Map that controls which symbols
are used to render different types of equipment. The “Default (Sys)”
map ships with the PROFILE software. Any number of additional
Symbol Maps can be created by the user.

Symbol Map Toolbar

Schematic Objects Toolbar


By default, the Schematic Objects Toolbar is located below the Date Bar
and enables the PROFILE user to change the appearance and content
presented in the live schematic diagram (see “Live Schematic” on
page 4-7).

Note

The toolbar can be moved using the vertical bar located at the far left of the toolbar.
Click the vertical bar and an outline will appear around the Schematic Objects
Toolbar. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar to the desired
location, then release the mouse button when the outline appears in the desired
location, and the toolbar will move to the new location.

The toolbar provides the user with the ability to display schematic
components (fluids, hole sections, casings, sidetrack symbols, and
labels), Wellbore equipment strings, perforations, and casing symbols,
and provides the user options for color, black and white (outline), or a
linear scaled display. The toolbar also has buttons to allow the user to
access the New Design Wizard, Date Filter, and the Data
Quality Report.

4-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The following options are available In the Schematic Objects Toolbar:

Icon Name Description

Schematic View Allows selection of different views of the schematic:


Single Wellbore View – Normal schematic view.
Multiple Wellbore View – Schematic with sidetracks shown using the
trajectory shape.
2D Wellhead View – 2D view of the current wellhead.
3D Wellhead View – 3D view of the current wellhead.

Mudline/Ground Level Mudline/Ground Level selected: Adds a mudline or indication of


ground level (in the form of a line) to the schematic located on the left
side of the Well Designer tab.
Labels selected: Adds a label to the schematic identifying either
Mudline or Ground. This command is only available if the Mudline/
Ground Level command has been selected.

Hole Sections Hole Sections selected: Adds Hole Sections to the schematic (based on
information in the Hole Section tab (see page 4-15) of the
Well Designer).
Sidetrack Cutoffs selected: Adds Sidetrack Cutoffs symbols to the
schematic for parent Wellbore(s) or child sidetracks. These cutoffs will
not be labeled, just placed at the appropriate depth.
Sidetrack Cutoff Labels selected: Adds a label to the Sidetrack Cutoff
in the schematic indicating the parent or child Wellbore connected to
the current Wellbore.

Casing Casing selected: Draws casing assemblies on the schematic (based on


information in the Casing tab, see page 4-22).
Just Casing Shoes selected: Change appearance of Casing Assembly
to draw casing shoes instead of casing equipment.

Cement Draws cemented intervals on the schematic based on depth intervals


entered in the Cementing tab (see page 4-24) of the Well Designer.

Wellbore Equipment/BHAs Adds Wellbore Equipment strings to the schematic (for example, drill
strings or completion strings).

Hole Openings Adds hole openings (intervals) to the schematic based on information
entered in the Wellbore Openings tab (see page 4-30) of the Well
Designer.

Stimulations Draws stimulated intervals on the schematic based on data entered in


the Stimulations tab (see page 4-32) of the Well Designer.

Wellhead Adds the Wellhead to the schematic based on information entered in the
Wellheads tab.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-5


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Icon Name Description

Cutaway Provides a cutaway view of the Wellbore Equipment drawn in the


schematic, or the vertical Wellhead Components, when in one of the
two Wellhead views.
No Cutaway – Draws solid Wellbore equipment.
Quarter Cutaway – Draws Wellbore equipment with a quarter of the
symbol cut away, allowing a partial view inside the string.
Half Cutaway – Draws Wellbore equipment with half of the symbol cut
away, allowing a full view inside the string.
Custom Cutaway – Draws the Wellbore with a custom cutaway display
of the main wellhead components with a 30° (minimum) to 330°
(maximum) angle cutaway. The custom cutaway angle is set in the
View > Options > Display tab.

Outline Click this icon to draw the schematic in black and white only,
producing an outline view.

Linear Scaled By default, the schematic displays all component symbols scaled to
enable all equipments to be represented. For example, space from a
long section of tubing is sacrificed in order to display short string
components like packers, other completion equipments, stabilizers, and
bits, which are only a few feet long.
Click the Linear Scaled icon to override the default setting and display
the entire string components scaled to a 1:1 ratio. Therefore,
components with relatively small lengths may display as 1 pixel in size
(that is, not visible).

New Design Wizard Use this button to quickly create a new Design using a wizard that
contains two dialog boxes (see page 4-33).

Filter Data by Date Click the Filter Data By Date icon to hide all data in the tab editors with
dates not applicable to the current display date (see page 4-37).

Data Quality Click the Data Quality icon to access the Data Quality Report
(see page 4-38).

Symbol Map
The Map field displays the current Symbol Map in use by the PROFILE
software. The picklist can be used to select a different Symbol Map (if
one is available).

For more information on mapping symbols, see the Symbol Manager


chapter on page 6-1.

4-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Reference Datum Level


Use the Datum field in the Well Designer to select a datum elevation for
the Design currently displayed. The selected elevation is used to adjust
depths along the Wellbore.

Any Well datum level elevation can be selected using the picklist.

Live Schematic
The Well Designer has its own live scaled schematic diagram. This
schematic provides a dynamic representation of the downhole
equipment configuration with depth and elevation scaling for the
Planned or Prototype Design or data selected in an Actual Design. The
live schematic is automatically updated when changes are made in the
Well Designer or the user changes the display date in an Actual Design.
A simple Print Preview feature allows users to print this schematic. The
Schematic Objects toolbar (see page 4-4) enables the user to disable
several drawing options. This includes the ability to display schematic
components (fluids, hole sections, casings, sidetrack symbols, and
labels), Wellbore equipment strings, perforations, and casing symbols.
The user can also zoom in or out, drag the diagram up or down, and
display black and white or color sketches.

If a sidetrack is selected in the Well Explorer, the parent Wellbore down


to the kick-off point will be drawn in the live schematic. If the Design is
an Actual Design, the application will honor locked Wellbore
information by disabling editing in the spreadsheets. If a Sidetrack
Design that is not Actual (that is, a Planned or Prototype Design) is open
in the Well Designer, all Wellbore data above the Sidetrack is read-only.

Well Designer Tabs


The tabs located within the Well Designer enable the user to add or edit
Wellbore equipment and operations information.

With a Design open, users may view, create, or update planned,


prototype, or actual Wellbore operations information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-7


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

When viewing an Actual Design, the PROFILE software directly


integrates with operations report information entered in the OpenWells®
software, displaying the same historical information outside the report
hierarchy. The information updated in the PROFILE software is shared
with the OpenWells software through the common EDM™ database,
allowing a PROFILE user to correct or add information to
OpenWells reports.

View Options
Additional view options are available in the Well Designer >
Schematic Detail cascading menu. You can also quickly turn on and off
specific schematic options with the buttons available on the Schematic
Objects toolbar. For example, you can toggle the display of cement on
and off with the Cement icon ( ).

Two Dimensional (2D) Three Dimensional (3D)


Wellhead View Wellhead View (with
1/4 cutaway)

Wellhead Schematic Views

4-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Zooming
Zooming is available with all Wellbore views. The 3D Wellhead view
is unique to all other views and explained below.

Single Wellbore, Multi Wellbore, and 2D Wellhead View


To zoom in on a particular area of the schematic:

• Select a schematic view in one of two ways:

— Well Designer menu > Schematic Detail > Single Wellbore,


Multi Wellbore, or 2D Wellhead View

— From the Schematic Objects toolbar, click the Schematic View


icon ( ), then select either Single Wellbore, Multi Wellbore,
or 2D Wellhead view

• Right-click the schematic and select Zoom in from the drop-down


menu. The display will zoom in one level.

• Once zoomed in, click and drag the schematic to move the
particular area of interest into view.

• The zoom level can be further increased by right-clicking and


selecting Zoom in again from the menu.

• To restore the schematic to its full view, right-click the schematic


and select Zoom out from the menu.

3D Wellhead View
Zooming is controlled by the mouse with 3D Wellhead view.

Select the 3D Wellhead view in one of two ways:

• Well Designer menu > Schematic Detail > 3D Wellhead View

• From the Schematic Objects toolbar, click the Schematic View


icon ( ), then select 3D Wellhead view

As you move the mouse over the schematic, a multidirectional cursor


displays ( ). This enables you to rotate and change viewing
orientation of the Wellhead.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-9


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Right-click and hold the mouse button on the schematic.

The cursor changes to an up/down arrow ( ).

With the right mouse button pressed, move the mouse up to zoom out
and down to zoom in. The display will zoom in and out as the mouse is
moved up and down with the right mouse button held.

Spreadsheets in Well Designer Tabs


The spreadsheets in the Well Designer are available to record or display
information about the data contained in the tab.

Click the Add Row icon ( ) or Insert Row icon ( ) to add a row,
then enter the necessary information on the new row. Click the Delete
Row icon ( ) to remove a row from the spreadsheet.

When the Filter Data By Date command (View menu > Filter Data by
Date) is deactivated, information that is not seen in the current
schematic will appear highlighted purple in the spreadsheet. Users
should not expect to see this data displayed in the schematic.

Purple Highlighted Data in Spreadsheets

4-10 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Trajectory Tab
The Trajectory tab provides various trajectory display options and a
spreadsheet of the stations defined in the definitive survey.

Trajectory
Options

Trajectory
Spreadsheet

Trajectory Tab

The Trajectory tab supports viewing of planned or actual trajectory


definitive survey information. Surveys stations are used in the
PROFILE software for displaying deviated Wellbore equipment
schematics, 3D views, plan views, and vertical section views.

For planned trajectories, you may choose to view the directional plan
generated in the COMPASS™ software, or create a planned trajectory
using the PROFILE software’s default set of trajectory profiles.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-11


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

For Actual Designs, the PROFILE software displays the definitive


survey compiled in the COMPASS software from measured survey
stations. Where the COMPASS software is not used, the OpenWells
software is used to record surveys. The Trajectory tab includes an option
to compile the definitive survey.

Trajectory Options
To choose a trajectory display option for the Design, select any one of
the trajectory type icons along the top of the Trajectory tab:

Icon Name

Vertical Well

Horizontal Well

Slant Well

Build-Hold-Build-Hold-Hold Horizontal Well

S Well (Build-Hold-Drop or Build-Hold-Build)

In addition to the trajectory options, editors are available to more


precisely control the planned trajectory profile. These trajectories do not
replace or integrate with directional Well planning tools available in the
COMPASS software.

4-12 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

To manipulate the trajectory paths, use the handles that appear (small,
yellow squares) along the trajectory path.

1 Place cursor over


edit point
3 Release
mouse button
to view results

2 Move cursor

Changing the Trajectory Path

Hover over a yellow handle and a multiple arrow cursor ( ) will


appear. Click and drag the handle to the appropriate location. If the
angle created is incorrect, simply click the trajectory type icon to undo
the change and return to the default trajectory path.

The Use Actual Survey icon ( ) can be used to display the schematic
along a trajectory defined by the definitive survey for the Design. This
icon will only appear when there is a definitive survey defined for the
Wellbore. Actual survey data can be collected for the Wellbore using
either the OpenWells or the COMPASS software. When no definitive
survey exists, but surveys are present, the PROFILE software enables
the engineer to create a pseudo-definitive survey through simple tie-on
of available surveys. For more accurate manipulation of the definitive
survey, use the COMPASS software to edit the properties of the Design.

Click the Mirror Image icon ( ) to flip the image from left to right
or right to left.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-13


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Multi-Wellbore View
The PROFILE software also supports display of multiple Wellbore
views for sidetrack and multi-lateral Wells. This view enables the
engineer to configure, display, and output a representative directional
Well sketch and modify the relative length and orientation of each
Wellbore. This has no effect on the Wellbore trajectory; the changes are
only used for the multi-Wellbore display.

To manipulate the orientation of any sidetracks off the main Wellbore,


click the Edit Multi-Lateral Trajectories icon ( ).

Right-click edit The PROFILE


point to switch software displays
sidetrack to other the sidetrack on
side of parent other side of parent

Changing the Location of a Sidetrack

To change the position of a sidetrack on the schematic:

• right-click the sidetrack handle and select Switch sidetrack to


other side, or

• click and drag the yellow handle at the end of each sidetrack to
adjust its orientation and length.

When sidetrack display is no-longer required, click the Edit Multi-


Lateral Trajectories icon ( ) again to return to the normal, single-
trajectory editing mode.

Trajectory Spreadsheet
Located at the bottom of the Trajectory tab, this spreadsheet lists
definitive survey station attributes such as Measured Depth (MD),
Inclination (Inc), Azimuth (Azi), Total Vertical Depth (TVD),
and position.

4-14 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

OpenWells® Software Survey Data


Click the Survey Stations (Based on True North) icon ( ) to import
OpenWells survey data, if it is available, to construct a simple definitive
survey trajectory. The icon is enabled only if survey data from the
OpenWells or the COMPASS software is available and the Design has
no definitive survey defined. If new survey data is entered in the
OpenWells software when the PROFILE software is open, select File >
Reload or click the Reload icon ( ) to enable the Merge OpenWells
Surveys icon. The icon is not active if a definitive survey has already
been defined for the Wellbore Design.

Hole Section Tab


The Hole Section tab provides editors that enable the PROFILE user to
define hole section geometries for each drilled section. The two
spreadsheets in the tab are available to record or display information
about the Hole Section Groups and Section Types.

Highlight the Hole Section to


enter or edit individual
Hole Sections

Previous Cased hole

Enter information about the


individual Hole Section. This area is New Open Hole Section
enabled when a Hole Section
is selected.

Hole Section Tab

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-15


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter Hole Sections, which
correspond to each bit size used to drill a Well.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter specific hole section
intervals (for example: Riser, Casing, Open Hole). To do so, highlight
the Hole Section to which you want toadd Hole Section Details and then
add the Hole Sections to the bottom spreadsheet of the Hole Section tab.
A typical set of Details for an onshore Well would include a Cased hole
section down to the previous casing and an open hole section to the
section TD or current bit depth. The cased hole section would have an
effective diameter of the ID of the Casing; the open hole effective size
would be the Bit diameter. For Offshore Wells, the effective diameter of
a Riser section would be the Riser size.

Note

Date-related columns, such as Hole Section Start Date/Time or Hole Section End
Date/Time, only display in Actual Designs.

If the WELLPLAN™ software is not being used, it is acceptable to only


enter the Open Hole description for each hole section. The Schematic
diagram does not use the Cased-hole or Riser information when
rendering the Well sketch.

4-16 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Drillstring/BHA Tab
The Drillstring/BHA tab contains a string editor that enables the
engineer to define one or more Drillstrings. Each Drillstring consists of
one more components that make up the complete assembly (for
example: Drill Pipe, HWDP, Drill Collars, Stabilizers, and a Bit).

Highlight the Drillstring to


enter or edit individual
Drillstring Components

Enter information about the individual


Drillstring Components. This area is
enabled when a Drillstring
is selected.

Drillstring/BHA Tab

For an Actual Design, you can navigate to each Drillstring used to drill
the Well. With a Planned or Prototype Design, normally a single
Drillstring is entered for a particular drilling scenario, though multiple
Drillstrings are supported (but not recommended). When multiple
strings are entered, all are drawn in the current schematic.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-17


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

For Drillstrings in an Actual Design (BHA Run), the depth of the bit as
shown on the schematic is taken from the current depth entered into the
associated daily operations report in the OpenWells software for the
current viewing date. This string depth is limited by the MD Out value
(pull depth) entered in the BHA Run spreadsheet found in the
Drillstrings section of the Daily Operations form. If the MD Out value
has been specified, then this will be the maximum depth at which the bit
will be drawn for the BHA Run. For Prototype or Planned Designs, the
bit depth is assumed to be the depth of the deepest hole section.

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter the Drillstrings
Summary. For Actual Designs, these are BHA Runs. For Planned/
Prototype Designs, this would be for a particular drilling scenario. For
example, you may want to design several Drillstrings to be used at
various dates during the lifetime of the Well, or design Drillstrings
for sidetracking.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter specific Drillstring
Components for each Drillstring. To do so, highlight the Drillstring to
which you want to add components and then add the components to the
bottom spreadsheet of the Drillstring/BHA tab.

Drag-and-drop
Click the Drag-and-drop icon ( ) to quickly and easily build a
drillstring using the Drag-and-drop string editor. The Drag-and-drop
Editor enables a user to add components to a string through a symbol
palette selection mechanism. For more information on Drag-and-drop
functionality, see page 4-40.

Set Active Date


Select a row in the spreadsheet and click the Set Active Date icon
( ) to view that data in the Live Schematic (see page 4-7). Clicking
the Set Active Date icon changes the selections in the Event Bar (see
page 4-3) and the Date Bar (see page 4-3).

4-18 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Component Properties Dialog Box


Component Properties are available in the Drillstring/BHA, Casing,
Wellbore Equipment, and Rod Strings tabs to enter detailed information
about each component in the assembly. After a component is added to
the string or assembly spreadsheets (lower spreadsheet within each tab),
the Properties icon ( ) is enabled. Click the Properties icon to open
the Component Properties dialog box and add information about the
component. The layout and contents of the dialog box depend on the
selected item. For example, Casing Properties differs from
Conventional Pump Properties. Also, the tabs that display for each
component may differ. The two most common tabs, which are discussed
below, appear in the Component Properties dialog box:

• General Tab (included in all Properties dialog boxes)

• Component Status History Tab

Additionally, certain Equipments feature the following Details tabs,


which are also discussed further: General, Component Status History,
and Component Details.

General Tab
The fields and controls that populate the General tab are dependent on
the selected assembly and vary accordingly. The following procedure
opens the Component Properties dialog box to the General tab:

Note

A component must be selected in the Components section of the Drillstring/BHA,


Casing, Wellbore Equipment, or Rod Strings tab to enable the Properties icon
( ) and access the Component Properties dialog box.

Highlight an assembly component in the Components spreadsheet.


Click the Properties icon ( ) to open the Assembly Components
dialog box.

Add/change data as needed, then click OK to save the data entered (or
edited) and return to the Well Designer. Click Cancel to return to the
Well Designer without saving any data entered or edited within the
Assembly Components dialog box.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-19


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Component Status History Tab


The Component Status History tab, located on the Component
Properties dialog box, is used to store historical component status
information not needed for Planned/Prototype Designs. In order to
access the Component Properties dialog box, a component must exist in
the spreadsheet to enable the Properties icon ( ). Use the following
procedure to add historical component status entries:

From the Well Designer, click the Casing tab, Wellbore Equipment
tab, or Rod Strings tab. Select a component from the Assembly
Components spreadsheet, then click the Properties icon ( ). The
Component Properties dialog box displays with the General tab open.

Select the Component Status History tab. From the Status area, click the
Add Row icon ( ) to enter status milestones such as when the
equipment was installed, pulled, or its configuration change (for
example: Open, Closed). From the Details area, enter component
information and Comments as needed. Information entered in the
Details area will populate the row you created in the Status area.

Click OK to save the data entered and close the dialog box or click
Cancel to close the dialog box without saving changes.

Component Details Tab


The Component Details tab, located on the Component Properties
dialog box, is used to describe component specific parameters for the
tool’s Section Type. In order to access the Component Properties dialog
box, a component must exist and be selected in the Components section
of the Drillstring/BHA, Casing, Wellbore Equipment, or Rod Strings tab
to enable the Properties icon ( ). The Component Details tab appears
only if the following components are chosen as the Section Type in the
Wellbore Equipment Assembly Components spreadsheet:

• Block • Pump oRd

• Conventional Pump • Screen

• Packer • Slotted Pipe

• Polished Bore Receptacles • Subsurface Safety Valve

4-20 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Use the following procedure to enter details about a component:

From the Well Designer, click the Wellbore Equipment tab. Select a
Wellbore Equipment Assembly, or click the Add Row icon ( ) or
Insert Row icon ( ) to add an Assembly if needed.

With the assembly selected, select a component from the Assembly


Components area or click the Add Row icon ( ) or Insert Row icon
( ) to add a Component if needed.

From the Section Type picklist located in the Assembly Components


area, select a component that has a Details tab in the Component
Properties dialog box (Block, Packer, PBR, Slotted Pipe, and so on).

If this is a new Section Type selection, the Component Properties dialog


box displays. If this is not a new Section Type selection and Auto
Catalog Select is enabled, select a tool from the Catalog and/or enter
additional information in the Assembly Components spreadsheet about
the component as needed.

With the component row selected in the spreadsheet, click the


Properties icon ( ). The Component Properties dialog box displays.

Select the Details tab and enter the necessary information.

Click OK to save the data entered and close the dialog box or click
Cancel to close the dialog box without saving changes.

Catalog
Use the Catalog dialog box to select assembly components from an
available catalog for the current equipment Section Type.

Note

If the Catalog is not available, the Assembly Components dialog box (see page 4-
19) displays with properties information for the selected assembly component.

Click the Catalog icon ( ). This icon may be grayed out for non-
supported Section Types. The Catalog dialog box displays.

Use the Catalog picklist to select the catalog from which to select an
equipment, then double-click to make an initial selection in any one of
the columns. This will narrow down the selections available in the other
data columns below the Catalog field.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-21


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Double-click an item in any one of the data columns and the selections
will again be filtered. As data is selected in each column, the other
columns are dynamically changed to reflect the selections available.

Once a selection is made in all columns so that one item remains in each
list, click OK. If an entry is made in error, click the Reset button to
return the lists to the default values. Click Cancel to return to the Well
Designer without making any changes.

Note

Single-clicking on selections does not select the item.

Casing Tab
The Casing tab is used to enter all planned or actual Casings, Liners, or
Tie-backs in the Well. A String Components spreadsheet enables the
user to enter information for each component type present in the string.

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter Casing Strings. For
example, you may want to design several Casing Strings to be installed
during construction of the Well, or design different Casing Strings for
sidetracks. The MD Top Value along with the length of all components
is used to calculate MD Base, which for Casings is the shoe depth.
Similarly, in the Components spreadsheet, the MD Top and Base for
each component is calculated using the assembly MD Top, previous
component lengths, and current component length.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter specific Casing String
Components for each assembly. To do so, highlight the Casing String to
which you want to add components and add the components to the
bottom spreadsheet of the Casing tab. For each component, it is
important to enter at least the OD, Length, Section Type, Component
Type, number of Joints (for Casing/Tubing), and a Description.

If the StressCheck™ software is used to design the Well, the Casings


data will be populated from the Casing Design. This is the same data as
created by the StressCheck software. If the CasingSeat™ software is
used, the Casings spreadsheet will be populated.

4-22 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Jewelry
The Jewelry icon ( ) opens the Assembly Properties dialog box that
contains a spreadsheet used to record accessories attached to the Casing/
Liner/Tubing String (for example: Centralizers, Scratchers, Stop
Collars, Alignment Clamps, and so on). The Jewelry is attached to the
Casing or Tubing at regularly spaced intervals as it is run. The following
example adds a Centralizer to the Casing:

From the Casing tab in the Well Designer, highlight a Casing String. If
needed, add a Casing String to the spreadsheet if none exist.

Click the Jewelry icon ( ). The Assembly Properties dialog


box displays.

From the Jewelry tab of the Assembly Properties dialog box, click the
Add Row icon ( ). The spreadsheet in the dialog box is available to
record or display information about Jewelry. Click the Delete Row icon
( ) to remove a row from the spreadsheet.

Select Centralizer from the Accessory Name picklist. Notice that the
Catalog icon ( ) is enabled after you remove the mouse focus off the
selected Assembly Name. To add the component from the catalog, click
the Catalog icon.

Enter MD Top and MD Base.

Enter Num - this is the number of components to add between MD Top


and MD Base. The PROFILE software will attempt to display as many
as possible within the depth range.

From the Comp Type Code, select BOW.

Enter information in the remainder of the fields as needed. Data input for
the remaining fields is optional.

Jewelry is entered by selecting the Accessory Name, which determines


the Section Type and Component Type. The main inputs in the
spreadsheet are: Accessory Name, MD Top, MD Base, and Num.

Click OK.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-23


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Zoom in on the schematic as needed to view the jewelry.

Casing Jewelry
(Bow Type
Centralizer)

Jewelry in the Well Schematic

The example above shows a set of three Centralizers that are truncated
to one Centralizer due to drawing space constraints imposed by
the schematic.

Cementing Tab
The Cementing tab is used to enter all planned or actual Cement jobs
performed in the Well. Primary, Squeeze and Plug cement job types are
supported. Multiple stages may be defined for each job as distinct
cemented intervals down the Wellbore.

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter Cement Jobs. For
example, you may want to record several Cement Jobs performed at
various dates during the lifetime of the Well, or design different Cement
Jobs for sidetracks.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter specific Cement Stages
for each job. To do so, highlight the Cement Job to which you want to
add stages and add the stages to the bottom spreadsheet of the
Cement tab.

4-24 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Wellbore Equipment Tab


The Wellbore Equipment tab is used to enter component information for
each planned, prototype, or actual completion string. For Planned and
Prototype Designs only, an interactive Drag-and-drop editor is available
to enable the user to graphically create the planned completion assembly
through selection of components from a symbol palette. The selected
symbol can be dragged onto the appropriate location on the string and
dropped. The Drag-and-drop palette is integrated with the components
spreadsheet to enable the engineer to enter actual component properties
information such as Length, OD, ID, Weight, Grade, and more.

Drag-and-drop
The Drag-and-drop string editor is accessed by clicking the Drag-and-
drop icon ( ) and allows you to quickly and easily build a Wellbore
equipment string. For more information on Drag-and-drop functionality,
see page 4-40.

Set Active Date


The Set Active Date icon changes the selections in the Event Bar (see
page 4-3) and the Date Bar (see page 4-3). Select a row in the
spreadsheet and click the Set Active Date icon ( ) to view that data
in the Live Schematic.

Component Properties Dialog Box


The Component Properties dialog box displays detailed information, or
properties, for an assembly component. For more information about this
feature, see page 4-19

Catalog
Use the Catalog dialog box to select assembly components from an
available catalog for the current equipment Section Type.

Note

If the Catalog is not available, the Assembly Components dialog box (see page 4-
19) displays with properties information for the selected assembly component.

For more information about this feature, see page 4-21

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-25


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Rod Strings Tab


The Rod Strings tab is used to enter Rod component information for
each planned or actual Rod string. For Planned and Prototype Designs
only, an interactive drag-and-drop editor is available to enable the user
to graphically create the planned assembly through selection of
components from a symbol palette. The selected symbol can be dragged
onto the appropriate location on the string and dropped. The drag-and-
drop palette is integrated with the components spreadsheet to enable the
engineer to enter actual component properties information such as
Length, OD, ID, Weight, Grade, and more.

Drag-and-drop
Click the Drag-and-drop icon ( ) to quickly and easily build a rod
using a Drag-and-drop string editor. The Drag-and-drop Editor enables
a user to add components to a string through a symbol palette selection
mechanism. For more information on Drag-and-drop functionality, see
page 4-40.

Set Active Date


Select a row in the spreadsheet and click the Set Active Date icon
( ) to view that data in the Live Schematic (see page 4-7). Clicking
the Set Active Date icon changes the selections in the Event Bar (see
page 4-3) and the Date Bar (see page 4-3).

Jewelry
Click the Jewelry icon ( ) to access the Assembly Properties dialog
box that contains a spreadsheet used to record accessories attached to the
rod string (for example, rod guides). Jewelry is attached to the rod string
at regularly spaced intervals as it is run.

Umbilicals
An umbilical is any kind of line that runs through the Wellhead down to
a Wellbore equipment (for example: electric power cable, hydraulic or
electric control line, fiber-optic sensor cable, or hydraulic injection
line). Click the Umbilicals icon ( ) to access the Assembly Properties
dialog box that contains a spreadsheet to record umbilicals attached to
the Wellbore equipment. The Umbilical Component is attached to the
Wellbore Equipment Assembly.

4-26 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The following procedure adds a Control line to a Sub-Surface Safety


Valve (SSSV):

From the Wellbore Equipment tab in the Well Designer, select and
highlight a Wellbore Equipment Assembly. If needed, add a SSSV
(Section Type) to the Assembly Components spreadsheet if none exist.

Click the Umbilical icon ( ). The Assembly Properties dialog


box displays.

From the Umbilicals tab of the Assembly Properties dialog box, click
the Add Row icon ( ). The spreadsheet in the dialog box is available
to record or display information about Umbilicals. Click the Delete Row
icon ( ) to remove a row from the spreadsheet.

From the Connected Component picklist, select SSSV. From the


Component Type picklist, select Control Line and enter the Length.

Enter information in the remainder of the fields as needed. Data input for
the remaining fields is optional.

Click OK.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-27


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Zoom in on the schematic as needed to view the umbilical component.

Control Line
(SSSV)

Connector

Control Line
(ESP - No
Connector)

Umbilicals With and Without Connectors

The example above shows two variations of umbilicals added to the


schematic. On the left, a control line is added to an ESP, which does not
have a connector. Notice that the SSSV above the ESP does have a built-
in connector and that the Control Line is attached to the connector.

4-28 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

When multiple umbilicals are attached, the PROFILE software will


arrange them to display uniformly, as shown below.

Multiple Umbilicals

Each umbilical is drawn to surface.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-29


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

In the schematic seen below, a Control Line clamp added in Jewelry is


seen supporting the SSSV Control Line.

Control Line Clamp

Control Line Clamp

Wellbore Openings Tab

A Wellbore Opening is an interval where the production annulus has


pressure communication with the formation or reservoir. The Wellbore
Openings tab is used to enter Wellbore intervals that expose the
production annulus to the formation. These may be perforated intervals,
slotted liners, open hole completions, or Smart-Well completions.

4-30 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter Openings. For
example, you may want to record several openings created at various
depths of the Well, or enter openings for different events.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter a specific Status for each
opening (for example, for a sliding sleeve component or where
perforations are squeezed). To do so, highlight the Opening to which
you want to add status and comments and add the status entries to the
bottom spreadsheet of the Wellbore Openings tab.

The Symbol Mapping editor enables different opening symbols to be


drawn for each opening status (for example: Open, Closed).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-31


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Stimulations Tab
The Stimulations tab is used to describe acidized or fractured intervals
that have been worked over to improve production or Wellbore
condition. Different types of stimulations can be defined. The Symbol
mapping editor enables different symbols to be drawn for different
stimulated interval types.

Spreadsheets are available for recording or displaying information


regarding stimulation jobs and stimulation job stages. Each stimulation
job may have one or more stages over different depth intervals.

Wellheads Tab
The Wellheads tab is used to add information for a Wellhead to a
Design. Actual Designs can have multiple wellheads, but non-actual
Designs (Planned or Prototype) can only have one Wellhead.

Highlight the Wellhead to enter or edit


individual Wellhead Components

Enter information about each Wellhead


Component.

Highlight the Wellhead Component to


enter or edit Outlets or Controls,
dependent on which is selected to view in
the Wellhead Components area

Wellheads Tab

4-32 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The top area of the tab provides a means to enter Wellheads. For
example, you may want to record several Wellhead configurations
created and used at various dates during the lifetime of the Well.

The middle area of the tab allows you to enter specific Wellhead
Components for each job. To do so, highlight the Wellhead to which you
want to add components and then add the components to the bottom
spreadsheet of the Wellheads tab. The catalog icons in the Wellhead
Components area provide a shortcut for data entry. By clicking either
the Component Catalog icon ( ) or Hanger Catalog icon ( ), you
can quickly input existing catalog data into the
Components spreadsheet.

The bottom area of the tab allows you to enter specific Outlets or
Controls for each Wellhead Component. To do so, highlight the
Wellhead Component to which you want to add outlets or controls and
then add the item to the bottom spreadsheet of the Wellheads tab. To
enter Outlets, click the Show Outlets Spreadsheet icon ( ) to display
the Outlets spreadsheet. Click the Show Controls Spreadsheet icon
( ) to display the Controls spreadsheet. You can also choose to toggle
on or off the bottom spreadsheet display with the Hide Additional
Spreadsheets icon ( ).

New Design Wizard


For engineers needing to quickly create a Design without having to
navigate through the Well Designer tabs, the New Design Wizard is
available. The wizard allows the user to enter the minimum data entry
requirements to generate a Design. Hole Sections, Casings, Cement, and
Completion string information may be quickly entered to generate
the Design.

In order to use the New Design Wizard command, a non-actual Design


must be selected (that is, the Phase must be either Prototype or Planned)
and the Design must be open in the Well Designer.

After the Design has been opened in the Well Designer tab, the Well
Designer menu appears. Follow the menu path:

Well Designer > New Design Wizard

Alternatively, you can click the New Design Wizard icon ( ) in the
Schematic Objects Toolbar.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-33


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

There are two steps in the New Design Wizard: New Casing dialog box,
and New Completion dialog box.

The first page in the New Design Wizard is the New Casing dialog box.

New Casing Dialog Box

From the String Name picklist, select a String Name for the new Casing
assembly or enter a name.

From the String Type picklist, select the String Type name.

Enter the Diameter of the casing assembly.

The Hole Sect. Diam field is automatically populated based on the


value entered in the Diameter field. Change the hole size if necessary.

Enter the Hole Section top measured depth in the Hole Sect. Top
MD field.

Enter the Hole Section’s base measured depth in the Hole Sect. Base
MD field.

The Casing Top MD field is automatically populatedbased on the value


entered in the Hole Sect. Top MD field. Adjust if necessary.

4-34 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The Casing Base MD field is automatically populated based on the


value entered in the Hole Sect. Base MD field. Adjust the depth
if necessary.

Activate the Cemented String check box if the casing is cemented.

If the Cemented String check box is activated, the Cement Top and
Base MD fields are automatically populated based on the value entered
in the Hole Sect. Top and Base MD fields. Adjust the Cement Top and
Base to the Planned Cement Top and Base MD if necessary.

To clear information from the fields in the New Casing dialog box,
click Clear.

A list of Existing Strings are displayed in the list to the right of the
measured depth fields. Once one string is entered, the next string can be
entered by clicking Next String.

To edit or view the previous string’s information (name, type, diameter,


and measured depths), click Prev String.

Once the Planned Casings have been defined in the New Casing dialog
box, click Next to move to the next step (New Completion page) in the
New Design Wizard.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-35


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

The New Completion page is the second page that appears when using
the New Design Wizard and enables the engineer to enter a simple
single or dual completion.

New Completion Dialog Box

First Completion Area

From the String Name picklist, select a String Name for the
new assembly.

From the String Type picklist, select a String Type for the
new assembly.

Enter the planned Length of the string.

Enter the Diameter of the planned string.

Enter the planned top measured depth of the completion assembly in the
Top MD.

Enter the Packer Depth if one is planned for the completion assembly.

4-36 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Perforated Interval (Opening)

Enter the top and base measured depth of the perforated interval in the
Top MD and Base MD fields.

Gravel Pack Area

Enter the top and base measured depth for a gravel pack in the Top MD
and Base MD fields.

Second Completion Area

Select the Allow Second Completion check box to allow data entry for
a dual completion. When this check box is deactivated, all fields in the
Second Completion area will appear grayed out.

Fields in the Second Completion area are the same as those in the First
Completion area.

When all fields in the New Completion dialog box are complete, click
Finish to complete the New Design Wizard. The Design can be refined
further using the editors/spreadsheets in the Well Designer tabs.

Filter Data by Date


Activating the Filter Data By Date command hides all data in the editors
with dates not applicable to the current display date.

The Filter Data By Date command is activated when a check mark


appears next to it in the menu. Follow the menu path:

Well Designer > Filter Data by Date

Alternatively, you can use the icon in the Well Designer Toolbar:

Tabs open in the Well Designer will show Wellbore equipment and
operations information that is available in the current schematic (white)
as well as information that is not available (purple). The availability of
information is based on the active date, which is either the date selected
in the Date Bar (see page 4-3) or the last day of the first Event for the
selected Design. The active display date appears in the Status Bar (see
“Status Bar” on page 3-76).

When the Filter Data By Date command is deactivated, information that


cannot be seen in the current schematic will appear highlighted (purple).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-37


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Users should not expect to see this data displayed in the schematic.
For example:

When the Filter Data By Date command is activated, the information


that cannot be seen in the current schematic is not displayed in the Well
Designer editors. For example:

Data Quality Report


The purpose of the Data Quality Report is to highlight suspect or
questionable data that may beimpacting the application’s ability to draw
a schematic of the selected Design. It provides the user with a visual tool
to allow them to see what data the PROFILE software is drawing and
determine if there are any data quality issues present in the openDesign.
The Data Quality rules checked by the PROFILE software are fixed and
cannot be changed by the user. The Data Quality command in the Well
Designer menu is available when a Design is open.

To access the Data Quality Report dialog box, follow the menu path:

Well Designer > Data Quality....

Alternatively, you can click the Data Quality icon in the Well
Designer Toolbar:

The Data Quality dialog box displays. This dialog box can be resized
and will remember its position and size. The Data Quality dialog box
can be left open while working within the application. The dialog box
contains two tabs: the Data Analysis tab and the Date Ranges tab.

4-38 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Data Analysis Tab


The Data Analysis tab is available for all Design types: Actual, Planned,
and Prototype.

Use the Show Errors, Show Warnings, and Show Information check
boxes to filter the data shown in the data analysis table.

Type Column
An icon representing the Data Type is displayed in this column.

Severity Column
The level of severity for the data quality problem is based on the
application’s ability to draw the schematic with the data provided. There
are three levels of severity in the PROFILE software: Information,
Warning, and Error.

Information
The PROFILE software is able to extrapolate and render the schematic
when a piece of data is missing. An example of this type of data problem
may be, “Inner Diameter not entered”.

Warning
The PROFILE software may have to ignore data entered in order to
render a schematic. An example of this type of data problem may be,
“Inner Diameter greater than Outer Diameter”.

Error
The PROFILE software may not be able to draw part of the schematic
at all (for example, no Section Type, or dates not adequately specified).

Report Column
Details concerning the data quality problem are recorded in this area.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-39


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

To access the problematic data, double-click the line containing the


error in the data analysis table to go directly to the offending cell or row.
If the problem data is an Event date issue, double-clicking the row in the
data analysis table will take you directly to the Event Properties dialog
box. Double-clicking a symbol mapping issue will open the
Symbol Map.

Date Ranges Tab


The Date Ranges tab is only available for Actual Designs.

This bar chart depicts the date ranges for report data (displayed in the
column on the left). The red vertical bar or Active Date represents the
current date being used for the schematic in the PROFILE software.

Note

The Active Date is based on the date selected in the Date Bar (page 4-3). If no date
is selected, the PROFILE software will assign the Active Date as the last day of the
last Event for the selected Design.

On the far left side of the bar chart, elements of the Reports are depicted
with symbols and a brief text description.

The bar chart provides a simplified way to see what Report data will be
included in the current schematic. The bars represent the date ranges for
specific Wellbore Equipment or Well Operations information (such as a
Casing or Liner installation). When these bars are crossed by the Active
Date line, this data will be visible on the PROFILE schematic.

Drag-and-drop String Editing


In the PROFILE software, a drillstring, Wellbore equipment, or rod
string can be quickly and easily built usingDrag-and-drop string editors.
The Drag-and-drop Editor enables a user to add components to a string
through a symbol palette selection mechanism.

4-40 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Drag-and-drop Construction is available on the Drillstring, Wellbore


Equipment, and Rod Strings tabs.

Note

When the icon is available, a drillstring or Wellbore equipment string can be


created or edited using the Drag-and-drop Editor. If the Drag-and-drop Editor is not
available, the icon will appear grayed out.

Click the icon to open the Drag-and-drop canvas and palette.


Before any symbols can be selected from the palette and placed on the
canvas, an assembly must be created in the Drillstring spreadsheet (if
you are in the Drillstring/BHA Tab) or the Wellbore Equipment
Assemblies spreadsheet (if you are in the Wellbore Equipment Tab).

The creation of an assembly activates the canvas, which then enables


symbols to be selected and added to the assembly.

Section Type Previous Page


Picklist
Next Page

Canvas

Palette

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-41


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Section Type Picklist


Use this drop-down picklist to select a section type from different types
of downhole tools. Once the section type is selected, all available
symbols for that type are displayed in the palette. The picklist for section
type is linked to the selected tab. If the Wellbore Equipment tab is
selected, not all section types are shown in the picklist.

Previous Page/Next Page


If the selected group of symbols contains more than one page in the
palette, these buttons can be used to access more symbols. The total
number of pages in the palette and current page number are displayed in
the lower right corner of the palette.

Click the Next Page icon ( ) to access the next page of symbols in
the palette. If there is only one page of symbols, or if the last page is
currently displayed, this icon is unavailable.

Click the Previous Page icon ( ) to access the previous page of


symbols in the palette. If the first page is currently displayed, this icon
is unavailable.

Canvas
The canvas located to the left of the palette contains a grid on which the
user can place symbols from the palette. If the canvas appears grayed
out, an assembly must be added in the Drillstring spreadsheet (if you are
in the Drillstring/BHA tab) or the Wellbore Equipment Assemblies
spreadsheet (if you are in the Wellbore Equipment tab). Once a row is
added, the canvas will become available for construction of the
drillstring or Wellbore equipment string.

Palette
The palette contains the group of symbols available for the selected
section type. A symbol can be selected from the palette and placed on
the grid. The user creates an assembly by selecting components from the
palette and dragging them into the correct sequence until the entire
assembly has been constructed.

4-42 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Order of Components
Select the component order for the drillstring or Wellbore equipment
string will be constructed from the bottom up or top down by using the
picklist located above the Components spreadsheet (Drillstring/BHA
tab) or the Assembly Components spreadsheet (Wellbore
Equipment tab).

To Place a Symbol on the Canvas


Select the appropriate section type from the picklist located above the
canvas. All symbols for the selected section type are displayed in
the palette.

Hover over the desired symbol. The following icon appears:

Click and hold on a symbol to select it. The following icon appears:

Drag the symbol to the appropriate location on the canvas. After the first
symbol is placed, any other symbols must slightly overlap the previous
symbol before they can be released. When the symbol is in a location
where it can be released (dropped) the icon will change to a thumbs up:

As more symbols are added to the canvas, the image will shrink to allow
the addition of more symbols.

Once the assembly is complete, the outside diameter (OD) and lengths
of the various sections can be edited in the Components spreadsheet.
The scaling of the outer diameter will not appear on the canvas;
however, when the canvas and palette are closed (click to close), the
scaling will appear in the Live Schematic (page 4-7).

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-43


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Right-click Menu for Symbols on the Canvas


Right-click a symbol on the canvas. The following options are available:
Delete Component and Delete Entire Assembly.

Delete Component
Use this command to delete the selected component.

Delete Entire Assembly


Use this command to delete the entire drillstring assembly or Wellbore
equipment string displayed on the canvas.

To Move the Entire Assembly


Hover over the drillstring or Wellbore equipment string. The
appears. Click the assembly.

The appears. Drag the assembly up or down on the canvas.

4-44 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

Summary

This chapter in the Training Manual covered all aspects of the Well
Designer and how it can be used to display, create, and edit Wellbore
operations information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 4-45


Chapter 4: The Well Designer

4-46 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5
The Wall Plot Composer
The Wall Plot Composer is used to customize the design of hard copy plot layouts to be viewed on
screen or printed on any number of printers or plotters.

Multiple Wall Plots are supported for each Design. Each Wall Plot template is saved in the
EDM™ database referenced to the Design. Each Wall Plot is displayed within its own tab on the
PROFILE™ software main screen. You can add, delete, and rename tabs with a right-click menu
and edit properties for that specific Wall Plot. Tabs can also be reordered using the tab properties
dialog box.

Objects can be added to the Wall Plot Composer using toolbar icons, the Composer > Add menu
item, or the right-click menu.

The Wall Plot Composer title bar displays the name of the active plot or “New Plot” if the plot is
not yet named. When something is changed, but has not been saved, an asterisk appears next to
the name.

Use the Wall Plot Composer to:

• add drawing objects to a plot layout.


• select the paper size.
• show a preview of the printed page.
• resize and re-scale each object.
• set the drawing order, background, and font of each graph or data box.
• edit the content of each piece of the schematic.
• add or edit labels.
• add lines, curves, shapes, and arrows.
• copy the plot to the Windows® Clipboard.
• save the Wall Plot to a unique file.

The following toolbars are available in the Wall Plot Composer tab:

• Wall Plot Composer Toolbar is used for several functions: saving plots and templates,
zooming, configuring Wall Plot layout, and printing.

• Object Toolbar is used to select objects to place on the Wall Plot—plots, data, arrows,
text boxes, and shapes and lines.

• Layout Toolbar is used to align the position of objects on the Wall Plot and customize
the grid.

Each toolbar is described in more detail in this chapter.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-1


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Wall Plot Composer Files

Wall Plots created or edited in the Wall Plot Composer can be saved as
templates to portable Wall Plot Composer (.PPC) files.

If you create a Wall Plot using one Design and then the plot is reopened
using the same Design, all changes made to the plot will be included. If
the plot is opened with a different Design, the layout and settings are
remembered, but changes made to labels are not.

PPC files are saved as special attachments to the Design. Plots can be
saved as .PPC files only. Stored in the plot file are:

• File version: To allow tracking changes over time and to maintain


backward compatibility with previous versions of the software.

• Printer and Page Settings: The Wall Plot Composer will attempt to
select this printer by default when printing or preview printing.

• Colors and Symbols: Color and symbol settings used by any


currently selected offset wells. When the WPC file is opened, these
settings will be restored in the same offset wells that are already
selected. After the WPC file is opened, selecting the offset wells
will not apply the color and symbols settings. The offset wells must
be selected prior to opening the WPC file.

• Plot objects and Sub-Objects: Settings that include any property


changes, and the positions of all labels.

Templates in the Wall Plot Composer


Templates are the backbone of the Wall Plot Composer and they allow
the user to quickly create a Wall Plot by choosing a default layout. They
also allow the user to create a template to use for several Designs. This
results in consistency of the information presented in the Wall Plots.

A template is a predefined .PPC file that can be applied to a Design to


create an instant Wall Plot. The template contains a layout for the
schematic and other elements in a Wall Plot.

5-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

The PROFILE software ships with several templates (.PPC files) that
can be used as defaults. The template can be changed using the Wall Plot
Composer Tab Properties dialog box. Additionally, users may create as
many of their own templates as they require.

Save Command
Use the Save command to save the current plot template.This will save
any changes that you have made to the active template.

Save As Command
Use the Save As command to access the Save Plot/Template As dialog
box to save a copy of the template to a new file name. Save the plot or
template as a PROFILE Plot Composer (.PPC) file.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-3


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Components in the Wall Plot Composer

The Wall Plot Composer title bar displays the name of the active plot or
“New Plot” if the plot has yet to be named. When something has
changed, but has not been saved, an asterisk appears next to the name.

The following example shows all parts of the Wall Plot Composer. Each
area is discussed in more detail in this chapter.

Object
Wall Plot Composer Toolbar Layout Toolbar Toolbar
Rulers

Wall Plot
Page

Wall Plot
Tabs

Example Wall Plot Composer Layout

5-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Page
The Wall Plot Composer page represents the paper used for outputof the
Wall Plot. Inside the page is a gray line that indicates the printable area
of the page. A dotted blue margin line may overwrite the gray line. The
margin indicates the area of the page that can contain drawing objects.
The gray dots on the page, if present, indicate the Snap to Grid settings
(see “Layout Toolbar” on page 5-15) that can aid the user in lining up
objects on the page.

Use the Page Setup dialog box (page 5-8) to change the page size or
printer/plotter.

Margins
The margins indicate the area within the printable page that can be used
for output. Margins are displayed on the page as a dotted blue line. The
printable area of the page is displayed as a gray line.

Changing the margins:

• Use the Page Setup dialog box (page 5-8).


• Use the Rulers. Click the left or right edge of the ruler (where it
changes from white to gray). This is the location of the margin.
Notice that the dotted margin line indicator lines up with the edge
of the ruler. The cursor changes to a double arrow ( or ).
Move the cursor to the desired margin location.

Rulers
The Wall Plot Composer has two rulers located along the top and to the
left side of the paper. The scale of the ruler will be affected if the Zoom
command (see “Wall Plot Composer Toolbar” on page 5-11) is used.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-5


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Rulers are used to:

• indicate the position of the cursor. The position is displayed as a


line in the rules and is also displayed numerically. The numeric
display is located to the left of the ruler that is located above
the paper.

• display the location of the currently selected object.


• indicate the location of the margins.

Changing the Ruler Display Units


To change the display units, follow the menu path:

Composer > Ruler Units


Alternatively, click the Ruler Units icon ( ) to select inches or
centimeters for the ruler units. These units are also used for the cursor
position numeric display located to the left of the top ruler.

Changing the Margins Using the Ruler


Click the left or right edge of the ruler (where it changes color from
white to gray). This is the location of the margin. Notice that the dotted
margin line indicator lines up with the edge of the ruler. The cursor
changes to a double arrow ( or ). Move the cursor to the desired
margin location. You can also change the margins using the Page Setup
dialog box (page 5-8)

5-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Wall Plot Composer Tabs


The Wall Plot Composer tabs are located at the bottom of the right panel
in the PROFILE main screen:

Wall Plot Composer Tabs

These tabs are used to manage multiple Wall Plots. Tabs can be added,
deleted, renamed, and their properties accessed using the View menu or
toolbar commands, or by right-clicking on a tab.

The Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties dialog box is used to change the
order of appearance for Wall Plot Composer tabs in the main screen. It
is also used to select templates for specific Wall Plots or a default
template for all new Wall Plots. To access the Wall Plot Composer Tab
Properties dialog box, follow the menu path:

View > Tabs > Tab Properties

or click the Tab Properties icon ( ). You can also right-click a tab
and select Tab Properties from the drop-down menu.

Wall Plot Composer Tab Properties Dialog Box

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-7


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Tab Layout Area


Select a tab from the Tab Layout list in the dialog box. Click the arrow
button to move the selected tab up or down in the list and change the
order of appearance of the tab in the Well Designer.

Click the Delete Row icon ( ) to remove Wall Plot tabs from
the Design.

Tab Properties Area


When a tab is selected in the Tab Layout area, the Tab Properties fields
become available. Use the Name field to change the name of a tab. Click
the Browse button ( ) to select a replacement template for the Wall
Plot in the selected tab.

Default Area
Click the Browse button ( ) to select a new default template for
Wall Plots.

Page Setup Dialog Box


The Page Setup dialog box is used to define the print area on real estate
available to the Wall Plot. This is done by selecting a page size and an
output printer or plotter. The Page Setup dialog box is available through
the Composer > Page Setup menu item or the Page Setup ( ) icon.

5-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Page Setup Dialog Box for Wall Plot Composer

Use the Page Setup dialog box to specify the paper size, margins (see
“Margins” on page 5-5), scaling, and layout for printing Wall Plot
Composer plots.

Paper Size Area


Click the Select from Printer button to access the Print Setup dialog
box, where you can choose a different printer or plotter. The Wall Plot
Composer provides editing ability using the selected printer/plotter
driver to draw the objects on the screen. The following controls are
available in this area of the dialog box:

• Paper Width—Enter the width for the paper or use the arrow keys
to select the appropriate paper width.

• Paper Height—Enter the height for the paper or use the arrow keys
to select the appropriate paper height.

• Printable Area Width—Enter the width for the printable area or


use the arrow keys to select the appropriate printable area width.

• Printable Area Height—Enter the height for the printable area or


use the arrow keys to select the appropriate printable area height.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-9


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Page Layout Area


This area of the Page Setup dialog box displays the orientation of the
paper for printing (either portrait or landscape). To change the page
orientation, click the Select from Printer button to access the Print
Setup dialog box.

Margins Area
The following fields are available in the Margins area: Top, Bottom,
Left, and Right.

Enter appropriate margins in each of the fields or use the arrow keys to
select the appropriate distance for the margin.

Object Scaling Area


The following options are available in the Object Scaling area:

• Do not resize objects—maintains objects the same size when the


paper size is changed. When this option is selected, the Fonts and
Lines fields for scaling factors are unavailable.

• Resize but maintain aspect ratio—proportionally resizes the


objects when the paper size is changed.

• Stretch objects to fit—resizes the objects in one direction when the


paper size is changed.

• Size Difference—read-only field that indicates the difference in


size between the current paper size and the size selected in the
dialog box.

• Font—scales the fonts to improve display when the paper size is


changed. Click the Preview button to review the changes before
accepting them.

• Lines—scales the lines to improve display when the paper size is


changed. Click the Preview button to review the changes before
accepting them.

• Preview button—allows you to review the changes made in the


dialog box before accepting them.

5-10 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Toolbars
There are three toolbars available in the Wall Plot Composer: Wall Plot
Composer Toolbar, Object Palette Toolbar, and Layout Toolbar. Each
toolbar is discussed in more detail below.

All Wall Plot toolbars can be moved using the vertical bar located at the
far left of the toolbar. Click the vertical bar and an outline will appear
around the toolbar. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag
the toolbar to the desired location. Release the mouse button when the
outline appears in the desired location, and the toolbar will move to the
new location.

Double-clicking the title barof any undocked toolbar will return it to the
last docked position.

Notes

• The Event Bar and Date Bar appear above the Wall Plot Composer only when
an Actual Design is open.
• For more information about the Event Bar, see “Event Bar” on page 3-71.
• For more information on moving around the Date Bar, Date Bar Symbols, Time
Control for the Date Bar, and Right-click menus, see “Date Bar” on page 3-71.

Wall Plot Composer Toolbar


The Wall Plot Composer Toolbar is used for saving plots and templates,
zooming, configuring Wall Plot layout, and printing. By default, the
Wall Plot Composer Toolbar is located in the upper left corner of the
Wall Plot area.

The following options are available in the Wall Plot Composer Toolbar:

Icon Name Description

New Open a new template. This will clear the content of the current Wall Plot area. A
message will appear asking if the current template should be saved.

Open Open a template file from the plot template directory

Save Save the current Wall Plot template.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-11


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Icon Name Description

Save As The Save Plot/Template As dialog box displays to save the current plot to a new
file name. Wall Plots or templates can be saved as PPC (Profile Plot Composer or
.ppc) files only (see page 5-3.).
Stored in the plot/template file is:
• File version: To allow tracking changes over time and to maintain backward
compatibility with previous versions of the software.

• Printer and page settings: The Wall Plot Composer will attempt to select this
printer by default when printing or preview printing.

• Colors and symbols: Any colors and symbols used by any offset wells that are
currently selected. When the PPC file is opened, these settings are restored in the
same offset wells that are currently selected. After the PPC file is opened,
selecting the offset wells will not apply the color and symbols settings. The offset
wells must be selected prior to opening the PPC file.

• Plot objects and subobjects: Including any property changes and the positions of
all labels.

Zoom To zoom in and out:


• Click the down arrow next to the Zoom icon to reduce or enlarge the Wall Plot
by selecting the zoom level from a list of percentages including Page Width and
Whole Page.

• Click the Zoom icon only. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass. Left-click
the plot to enlarge it or zoom in. Right-click to reduce it or zoom out. Click the
Zoom button again to exit zoom mode.

Ruler Units To change ruler units:


• Click the down arrow next to the Ruler Units icon to select inches or centimeters
as the units for the Ruler on the Wall Plot Composer.

• Click the Ruler Units icon only. This will select inches as the units for the Ruler
on the Wall Plot Composer.

Properties Click the Properties icon to access the Properties dialog box to configure the
selected object. If an object is not selected, this button is not accessible.

Bring to Front Click the Bring to Front icon to place the selected object in front of another object
on the Wall Plot. When two graphs are marked as opaque, the top component will
overwrite the bottom component.

Send to Back Click the Send to Back icon to place the selected object behind another object on
the Wall Plot. When two graphs are marked as opaque, the top component will
overwrite the bottom component.

5-12 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Icon Name Description

Import Click this icon to import a drawing object from a Wall Plot composer file (.WPE)
into the Wall Plot.

Export Click this icon to export selected objects to a Wall Plot Composer (.WPE) file.
Exported objects can be imported by clicking the Import icon.

Page Setup Click this icon to access the Page Setup dialog box. Use the Page Setup dialog box
to select the printer/plotter and paper for which the plot is designed. You can also
specify the object on the plot to be stretched or resized to fit the paper size. A
percentage of the change in paper size can be applied to the fonts and lines to
maintain proportions as the paper size changes. All changes can be previewed
before accepting them. (See page 5-8.)

Object Toolbar
The Object Toolbar is used to select drawing objects to be added to the
Wall Plot and by default is located on the far right side of the Wall Plot
area. If you do not see the toolbar, select View > Toolbars >
Object Palette.

Notes

• The toolbar can be moved using the vertical bar located at the far left of the
toolbar. Click the vertical bar and an outline will appear around the Wall Plot
Composer Toolbar. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the
toolbar to the desired location, then release the mouse button when the outline
appears in the desired location, and the toolbar will move to the new location.
• Double-clicking on the title bar of any undocked toolbar will return it to the last
docked position.

The following options are available in the Object Toolbar:

Icon Name Description

Schematic Click this icon to add a schematic to the Wall Plot. Move the cursor to the Wall
Plot page, then click and drag an area for the schematic to be drawn on the Wall
Plot. See page 5-19.

Wellhead Click this icon to add the wellhead schematic to the Wall Plot. Move the cursor
to the Wall Plot page and click and drag an opening for the schematic to be
placed on the Wall Plot.

Multi-lateral Click this icon to add the multi-lateral schematic to the Wall Plot. Move the
cursor to the Wall Plot page and click and drag an opening for the schematic to
be placed on the Wall Plot. For more information, see “Working with Objects
on the Wall Plot Composer” on page 5-28.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-13


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Icon Name Description

Lithology Column Click this icon to add a lithology column to the Wall Plot. See page 5-21.

Data Box Click this icon to select information to include on the plot from predefined data
groups. You can also configure your own data boxes by selecting User Defined
from the list that appears. See page 5-22.

XY Graph Click this icon and select an XY graph from the list. Then, click and drag an
area for the graph to be drawn on the Wall Plot. See page 5-22.

3D Graph Click this icon to add a 3D Graph to the Wall Plot. Click and drag an area for
the graph to be drawn on the Wall Plot. See page 5-23.

Picture Click this icon to add a picture object or logo to the Wall Plot. Pictures can be
specified as the background for any rectangular object, including: graphs, data
boxes, legends, and so on. Pictures are saved with the plot file. See page 5-24.

Text Click this icon to add a text box to the Wall Plot. See page 5-24.

Rectangle Click this icon to add a rectangle to the Wall Plot. *

Polygon Click this icon to add a polygon to the Wall Plot. *

Ellipse Click this icon to add an ellipse to the Wall Plot. *

Circle Click this icon to add a circle to the Wall Plot. *

Line Click this icon to add a line to the Wall Plot. *

Polyline Click this icon to add a polyline to the Wall Plot. *

Curved Line Click this icon to add a curved line to the Wall Plot. *

Arrow Click this icon to add an arrow to the Wall Plot. *

For more information about adding objects to the Wall Plot, see “Working with Objects on the Wall Plot
Composer” on page 5-28

5-14 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Layout Toolbar
The Layout Toolbar enables the user to clean up the Wall Plot by
aligning or spacing different drawing objects on the page. By default,
the Layout Toolbar is located in the upper right corner of the Wall Plot
area next to the Wall Plot Composer Toolbar. The Alignment Tools are
only available when two or more drawing objects are selected.

Icon Name Description

Align Left Click this icon to align two or more selected objects along a vertical line
defined by the left edge of the last object selected.

Align Right Click this icon to align two or more selected objects along a vertical line
defined by the right edge of the last object selected.

Align Top Click this icon to align two or more selected objects along a horizontal line
defined by the top edge of the last objects selected.

Align Bottom Click this icon to align two or more selected objects along a horizontal line
defined by the bottom edge of the last objects selected.

Center Vertically Click this icon to align one or more selected object(s) along a vertical line
defined by the middle of the selected objects.

Center Horizontally Click this icon to align one or more object(s) along a vertical line defined by
the middle of the selected objects.

Space Across Click this icon to evenly space three or more objects across the page. This is
accomplished by spacing objects between the objects with the furthest left and
furthest right edge of all selected objects. The Wall Plot composer attempts to
make the space between the objects the same.

Space Down Click this icon to evenly space three or more objects down the page. This is
accomplished by spacing objects between the objects with the top-most and
bottom-most edge of all selected objects. The Wall Plot composer attempts to
make the space between the objects the same.

Make Same Width Click this icon to make all selected objects the same width as the last
object selected.

Make Same Height Click this icon to make all selected objects the same height as the last
object selected.

Make Same Size Click this icon to make all selected objects the same size as the last
object selected.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-15


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Icon Name Description

Grid Click this icon to activate or deactivate the grid on the Wall Plot.

Snap to Grid Click this icon to create a background grid on the plot to help position objects
on a plot. When snap to grid is selected, drawing objects will reposition,
moving to the next closest grid point.

Grid Settings Click this icon to access the Grid Setting dialog box to change the spacing size
of the grid.

Drawing Objects
A drawing object is a graph, legend, text box, schematic, lithology track,
or other item that is added to a Wall Plot Composer plot using the Object
Toolbar (see “Object Toolbar” on page 5-13), the Composer > Add
menu item, or the right-click menu. Objects can be configured, resized,
and customized in many ways. The following objects can be added:
Schematic, Lithology Column, Data Box, XY Graph, 3D Graph,
Picture, Text, and Art Objects.

Objects contain subobjects that cannot be moved outside of the object.


Examples of subobjects found within an object include: lines, text,
labels, and grids.

In order to change the appearance of an object or subobject, it must first


be selected.

Selecting Objects and Subobjects on the Wall Plot


Click the black line outlining the object or subobject. The outline will
change to indicate the object is selected. To select more
than one object, press Shift as you select objects. To select all
subobjects in a group, select the first subobject, then press Alt when you
select the second subobject.

Note

You must select an object before you can resize, move, customize, or delete it.

Moving Objects or Subobjects on the Wall Plot


Select the objects or subobjects that you want to move.

5-16 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Slightly move the cursor until it changes to .

Press and hold the left mouse button until the object or subobject is in
the desired location. Subobjects within an object cannot be moved
outside of the object.

Deleting Objects or Subobjects


Select the objects or subobjects to be deleted. Press Delete. Labels can
be hidden (not deleted) using a right-click menu for the object.

Resizing Objects or Subobjects


Objects such as graphs configured with a specific scale cannot be
resized.

Select the objects or subobjects to be resized. Slightly move the cursor


over the small box located on the boundary of the object until it changes
to .

Press and hold the left mouse button until the object or subobject is the
desired size. Subobjects within an object cannot be resized outside of the
object. To rescale the fonts and line thickness and maintain size relative
to the object box, press and hold Shift while resizing.

Aligning Objects and Subobjects on the Page


Select the objects or subobjects that you want to align on the page. Refer
to Selecting an Object or Selecting a Subobject within an Object for
instructions on selecting objects or sub-objects within objects.

Use the Layout Toolbar options (page 5-15) to align the object on
the page.

Object Properties

Object Properties Dialog Box


The Object Properties dialog box allows the user to change settings for
an object or subobject. These settings may include details, scales, grid
lines, backgrounds, fonts, pictures and other information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-17


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

To access the Properties tabs, right-click and select Properties, click the
Properties icon ( ), or double-click the object in the Wall Plot. Use
the following tabs to customize or configure objects or subobjects:

Object Properties Tabs Available

Schematic Object Tracks tab


Background tab
Fonts tab

Geological Column Geological Column Options tab


Picture tab
Background tab
Fonts tab

Data Box Data Box tab


Picture tab
Background tab
Fonts tab

XY Graph (Section, Plan, Days vs. Scale tab


Depth, Production)
Axis & Grid tab
Picture tab
Background tab
Fonts tab
Grid Lines tab
Axis Lines tab

3D Graph Picture tab


Background tab
Line Styles tab

Logo and Picture Picture tab


Background tab

Text Box Text Box tab


Colors and Lines tab

Rectangle, Polygon, or Ellipse Background tab

Line, Polyline, Curved Line, or Arrow Colors and Lines tab

For more information on each of the specific tabs, see PROFILE Help.

5-18 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Schematic Object
A schematic object can be added to the Wall Plot page using the
Composer > Add > Schematic menu path, or using the Schematic icon
( ) in the Object Toolbar.

A schematic object is a visual representation of the Design’s


Wellbore Equipment.

BHA Summaries
From the Schematic Properties dialog box (Filter Area), you can choose
to display the current Drillstring/BHA, or any other assembly available
for the active Design. When a Drillstring/BHA is chosen, the application
will temporarily switch to the time of the assembly, and all data loaded
in that schematic object is for the date corresponding with the
selected assembly.

In the PROFILE software, schematics are categorized as three types:


Wellbore, Wellhead, and Multi-Lateral. All schematic objects contain a
number of tracks, which may include Casing Details, Casing Depths,
Wellbore Equipment Depths and other information, as well as the Well
sketch itself. A Track is a column that contains information that displays
in the Schematic Object. A large number of different schematic track
types are supported. Tracks can be selected using the Tracks tab in the
Schematic Object Properties dialog box.

Wellbore, Wellhead, and Multi-Lateral Schematic Object Properties


Dialog Boxes
Right-click the Wellbore Schematic Object in the Wall Plot Composer,
then select Properties from the drop-down menu. Alternatively,
double-click the object, or select the object and click the Properties
icon ( ).

The Properties dialog box for the Schematic Object displays. The
following tabs are available: Tracks, Background, and Fonts.

Tracks Tab
A Track is a column that contains information that displays in the
Schematic Object. Each track contains information from the Well
Designer. Tracks may include Casing Details, Casing Depths, Wellbore
Equipment Depths, and many other types of downhole information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-19


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Tracks Area

To append (add) a track, click Append... below the list of Tracks.

The Add Tracks dialog box displays. Choose a track from the list in the
Available Tracks area and click OK.

The selected track will be added to the bottom of the Tracks list in the
Tracks area of the Tracks tab. Click Apply or OK to see the new track
in the schematic.

To insert a track, select the track in the Tracks list above which the
inserted track is to appear. Click Insert... below the list of Tracks and
use the Add Tracks dialog box to select a track.

The new track will be added above the selected track in the Tracks area
of the Tracks tab. Click Apply or OK to see the new track in
the schematic.

To remove a track, select the track from the Tracks list and click
Remove. The selected track is removed from the Tracks list.

Up Arrow

Click the up arrow to move the selected track up one position in the list
displaying the order of the schematic tracks.

Down Arrow

Click the down arrow to move the selected track down one position in
the list displaying the order of the schematic tracks.

Link Tracks

Click this icon to link together two tracks in the schematic object on the
Wall Plot. Linked tracks will be combined in the Wall Plot. Press and
hold Shift while selecting two tracks in the Tracks list. Click to link the
tracks. The Schematic Drawing track cannot be linked to any
other tracks.

Remove Link

Click this icon to remove the link between two tracks in the schematic
object on the Wall Plot. The Remove Link icon will be available when
a track that is linked to another track above or below it is selected.

5-20 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Float Labels

Click this icon to turn the labels from any track into floating labels.
Floating labels appear directly on the schematic itself rather than in a
track to the left or right. Floating labels can be moved anywhere on the
schematic while retaining a tether line to the part of the schematic they
reference. Use the same icon to return the labels to a track.

Each Track type has its own Properties dialog box.

To access the Properties dialog box for a Track, select the track in the
Tracks list and click Properties.

For a complete list of all Schematic Object Tracks available in the Wall
Plot Composer, see PROFILE Help.

Filter Area

Select the Display All Drillstrings/BHAs check box to display all


Drillstrings and BHAs associated with the open Design in the Display
Assembly list. Select an assembly from the list by selecting the option
button corresponding to the assembly to be displayed. Only one
assembly can be selected at a time.

Note

The Filter area in the Tracks tab allows the user to select and deselect filters that
apply to the entire schematic object.

Geological Column Object


The Geological Column is also known as the Lithology Column or
Stratigraphic Column. This column receives data from the Wellbore
Formations tab on the Wellbore Properties dialog box.

To add a geological column to the Wall Plot page, follow the menu path
Composer > Add > Geological Column, or click the Geological
Column icon ( ) in the Object Toolbar.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-21


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

A Geological Column is a visual representation of the stratigraphic


layers intersected by the Wellbore. Use the Geological Column Options
tab in the Geological Column Properties to define the lithology column
for the schematic. Lithology data comes from Project Properties and
Wellbore Properties in the Well Explorer in the OpenWells® software.
Lithology symbols may be configured in the Database Properties dialog
box of the StressCheck™ software, CasingSeat™ software, PROFILE,
OpenWells, and WELLPLAN™ software Well Explorer. The Lithology
Editor in the COMPASS™ software is accessed with a right-click menu
command from the Database node.

For more information about Geological Column Object properties, see


PROFILE Help.

Data Box Object


Data boxes are used to add data-driven text information to the Wall Plot
to further describe information defined within the Design. For example:
Company, Project, Site, or Well information; Reference Datum
information; Design details; Casing or Tubing summaries; and more.

To add a data box to the Wall Plot page, use the Composer > Add >
Data Box menu path and select a data box type from the submenu.
Alternatively, click the Data Box icon ( ) in the Object Toolbar. Move
the cursor to the Wall Plot page and click and drag an area for the data
box to be placed on the Wall Plot.

For more information on the Data Box Properties dialog box, see
PROFILE Help.

XY Graph Object
Survey and Drilling progress graphs containing an X and Y axis can be
added to the Wall Plot.

To add a graph to the Wall Plot page, use the Composer > Add > XY
Graphs menu path and select a graph type from the submenu provided:
Section, Plan, Days vs Depth, or Production. Next, click and drag an
area for the plot to be placed on the Wall Plot page.

Alternatively, right-click the Wall Plot page and select the graph type
from the drop-down menu, then click and drag an opening for the plot
to be placed on the Wall Plot. You can also click the XY Graph icon
( ) and then click and drag an opening for the plot to be placed on the
Wall Plot page.

5-22 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Section Graph
A section view of the current Wellbore trajectory plots vertical section
(x-axis) location against vertical depth (y-axis). This plot is also known
as a trajectory profile plot. Vertical section is the distance of the Well
away from the origin against a vertical plane defined by the vertical
section azimuth.

Plan Graph
A Plan Graph, or view, is a graph of the current Wellbore (plan or
survey) trajectory location with local East as the x-axis and local North
as the y-axis.

Days vs Depth Graph


A Days v Depth graph plots drilling progress for the current Event. This
information is sourced from OpenWells Daily Operations Reports. The
Days vs. Depth graph is relevant for Drilling Events only. The graph
displays Daily Measured Depth descending along the y-axis against
Days From Spud (DFS).

Production Graph
The Production Graph enables a user to view historical production or
injection volumes for a selected completion within the current Wellbore.
This information would be captured in EDM using the TOW/cs®
production field data capture application. You can choose to view Daily
or Monthly Production or Injection data. For Production data, you can
view Oil, Water, Gas, or Condensate volumes. For Injection data, you
can view Water, Gas, CO2, and Steam volumes. For each graph,
cumulative total volumes of each fluid/gas are displayed in the graph
header.

For more information on the XY Graph Properties dialog box, see


PROFILE Help.

3D Graph
3D Survey Graphs can be added to the Wall Plot. The 3D Graph is a
three-dimensional view of the Wellbore trajectory path based on the
input of survey or plan information.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-23


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

To add a 3D Graph to the Wall Plot page, follow the menu path
Composer > Add > 3D Graph. Alternatively, click the 3D Graph icon
( ) in the Object Toolbar. Move the cursor to the Wall Plot page, then
click and drag an area for the graph to be placed on the Wall Plot. The
orientation of the 3D Graph can be adjusted using the mouse
and keyboard.

For more information on the 3D Graph Properties dialog box, see


PROFILE Help.

Picture Object
Logos can be added to the Wall Plot.

To add a logo to the Wall Plot page, use the Composer > Add > Logo
menu path and select a logo type from the submenu. Alternatively, click
the Picture icon ( ) in the Object Toolbar. Move the cursor to the
Wall Plot page, then click and drag an area for the logo to be placed on
the Wall Plot.

For more information on the Picture Object Properties dialog box, see
PROFILE Help.

Text Object
Text Objects can be added to the Wall Plot.

To add a text object to the Wall Plot page, use the Composer > Add >
Art Tools > Text menu path. Alternatively, click the Text icon ( )
in the Object Toolbar. Move the cursor to the Wall Plot page, then click
and drag an area for the text box to be placed on the Wall Plot.

For more information on the Text Object Properties dialog box, see
PROFILE Help.

Art Tools
Use the same methods used to add other objects to the Wall Plot to add
art objects to a page. Once an object is drawn on the Wall Plot using the
art tools, it can be edited using the right-click menu.

5-24 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

The following objects have a right-click menu for configuration:


Polygon, Line, Polyline, Curved Line, and Arrow.

Note

The rectangle, circle, and ellipse art objects do not have the options described below
(Edit Points, Delete Point, Open Curve, Straight Segments/Curved Segments) in
their right-click menu.

Select from the right-click menu to access many of the configuration


features for polygons, lines, polylines, curved lines, or arrows. Each
command available in the right-click menu is discussed below.

Edit Points
Use this option to place the line in edit mode, so that it can be broken
and new points inserted. If a polygon is selected, more points can be
added. To exit the mode, right-click the line and select Exit Edit Points.

Sequential Mode
Use this option to continue to add line segments from the last drawn
segment. To exit the mode, right-click the line and select Exit
Sequential Mode.

Delete Point
Use the mouse to select a point on the line or polygon, right-click, and
select Delete Point to delete the selected point.

Open/Close Curve
Toggle between adding or removing a line to the last drawn line segment
for a curve.

Straight Segments/Curved Segments


Toggle between joining points with a curved or straight line.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-25


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Cut/Copy/Paste
These commands follow standard MS Window conventions, including
shortcut keys Ctrl+X (cut), Ctrl+C (copy), and Ctrl+V (paste).

Right-click Menu Items for all Art Tool Objects


The following right-click menu commands are available for all objects
created using the art tools’ (Rectangle, Polygon, Ellipse, Circle, Line,
Polyline, Curved Line, and Arrow) art tool objects.

Group/Ungroup/Regroup
Grouped objects can be moved together around the Wall Plot page. To
group objects, select two or more objects, then press and hold Shift and
click each object. A selected object will display with edit points enabled.
Right-click one of the selected objects and select Group from the drop-
down menu.

To undo the grouping, right-click the group and select Ungroup from
the drop-down menu.

Ungrouped objects that were previously grouped can be quickly


grouped again with the Regroup command. Right-click one of the
previously grouped objects and select Regroup from the drop-down
menu to restore the grouping.

Order
Use these options to specify the display order of an object that overlaps
another object. Bring to Front moves the object to the front of all
objects that overlap it. Send to Back moves the object to the back of all
objects that overlap it. Bring Forward moves the object up one layer
when overlapped by other object(s). Send Backward moves the object
back one layer when overlapped by other object(s).

Import
This option opens the Import Library From dialog box to import a Wall
Plot Export file (.WPE file).

5-26 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Export
This option opens the Export Library To dialog box to export an object.
Formats available for export are Wall Plot Export (.WPE) or Scalable
Vector Graphics (.SVG).

Defaults
Use this option to configure the font and line styles for an object type
(that is, all graphs, or all data boxes) and save the font and line styles to
be used as defaults.

Saved defaults are automatically applied when a new instance of that


object type is created. Defaults are stored in Wall Plot Default files
(.WPD) in the Landmark\EDT\Profile\WPC\ Defaults folder.

Note

The Default folder will not exist until a default has been saved in the Wall
Plot Composer.

The first part of the name identifies the type of object the defaults are
for, and the second part identifies the size of paper. The file groupings
are split into five groups based on the diagonal size of the paper selected
in the Page Setup dialog box (page 5-8) available through the
Composer menu item.

SMAL - Small - e.g. A5

REGU - Regular - e.g. US Letter, A4, A3

INTM - Intermediate - e.g. A2

LRGE - Large - e.g. A1

HUGE - Huge - A0, 36" X 45" or larger

For example, DataBox_REGU.wpd would be the defaults for data box


objects on letter size paper.

Save
Use this option to save the defaults.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-27


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Apply
Use this option to apply the defaults to the selected object.

Properties
Use this option to access the properties for the selected object. The
properties tabs are used to configure many aspects of the object.

Working with Objects on the Wall Plot Composer


Wall Plot Composer objects and subobjects can be configured,
customized, moved, and resized. In order to change the appearance of an
object or subobject, it must first be selected. For information about
selecting, moving, deleting, resizing and aligning objects on the Wall
Plot, see “Drawing Objects” on page 5-16.

Adding an Object to the Wall Plot


Select the object you want to add to the Wall Plot using the Object
Toolbar icons, the Composer > Add menu item, or by selecting an
object from the right-click menu. (If the toolbar icons are not active,
click anywhere on the Wall Plot page to activate them.) To use the right-
click menu, click anywhere on the Wall Plot page where there is not
already an object.

Using the mouse, place the crosshair cursor where one corner of the
object will be located. If you are adding an art object (other than a circle
or ellipse), refer to Adding an Art Object instructions below.

Click and hold the left mouse button as you select the area for the object
to be displayed.

Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size. The object
will be displayed.

5-28 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Adding an Art Object to the Wall Plot


Select the art object to be added to the Wall Plot using the Object
Toolbar icons, the Composer > Add menu item, or by selecting an art
object from the right-click menu. (If the toolbar icons are not active,
click anywhere on the Wall Plot page to activate them.) If you are adding
a circle or ellipse, refer to the Adding an Object to the Wall Plot
instructions above. To use the right-click menu, click anywhere on the
Wall Plot page where there is not already an object.

Using the mouse, place the crosshair cursor where you want the starting
point to be. Then, refer to the following:

• Line—click where you want to start the line. Continue to hold the
mouse button as you move the cursor to the end point. Release the
mouse button.

• Polygon—begin as if you were drawing a line. To add another


segment to the line, click anywhere on the line and continue to
press the mouse button as you move the cursor where you want the
segment to be. Release the mouse button. The last point will
automatically be joined to the first point.

• Polyline—same procedure as for polygons except the first and last


points are not joined

• Curved Line—same procedure as for polylines except that the line


segments are curved

• Arrow—same procedure for lines except there is an arrow head at


one end of the line

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 5-29


Chapter 5: The Wall Plot Composer

Summary

This chapter outlined the main areas in the Wall Plot Composer of the
PROFILE software. You learned how to use the Wall Plot Composer to
customize the design of hard copy plot layouts for viewing on screen
or printing.

The addition and editing of objects and subobjects to a plot was


discussed in detail. Each of the available Wall Plot objects was
described item by item.

The three toolbars available in the Wall Plot Composer were


also described.

5-30 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6
Symbol Manager
Symbol Manager is an important tool used to streamline the design of Drillstrings and
Completion tool symbols used within the PROFILE™ software. The symbols, stored in small
.PSY files, are organized using the Symbol Map.

To access Symbol Manager, follow the menu path: Start > Programs > Landmark Engineer's
Desktop 5000.1.7 > Tools > Symbol Manager. You can also access Symbol Manager as follows:

• Select menu path Tools > Symbol Manager from within the PROFILE software.

• From the main PROFILE toolbar, click the Symbol Manager icon ( ).

To access Online Help for Symbol Manager, follow the menu path: Start > Programs >
Landmark Engineer's Desktop 5000.1.7 > Documentation > Help > PROFILE Symbol
Manager or select Help > Contents from within the application.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-1


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbols in the PROFILE™ Software

The PROFILE software provides you with the ability to display


Wellbore equipment schematic diagrams. In order to display this
information, equipment symbols are required. The symbols are created
and managed using the Symbol Manager.

All symbols available in the PROFILE software fall into one of the
following types:

• Drillstring Tools

Accelerator, Accessory, Bit, Casing Scraper, Casing Shoe,


Centralizer, Coiled Tubing, Connectors, Cuttings Bed Impeller,
Drill Collar, Drill Pipe, Eccentric Stabilizer, Fish, Float Collar,
Gauge, Gravel Pack, Hanger, Heavy Weight, Hole Opener, Jar, Mud
Motor, MWD, Open Hole, Perforated, Port Collar/Diverter Sub/
Circulating Sub, Slotted Pipe, Stabilizer, Stimulations, Sub, Tree
Component, Tubing, Underreamer, Unknown, Valve.

• Completion Tools

Block, Casing, Conventional Pump, Electrical Submersible Pump,


Hydraulic Lift Pump, Instrument, Intelligent Well Tool, Mandrel,
Packer, Polished Bore Receptacle, Progressing Cavity Pump, Pump
Rod, Sand Control Screen, Subsurface Safety Valve.

• Wellhead Tools

Wellbore Equipment, and Wellhead Component.

Within each section type, there may be one or more component types,
each requiring its own symbol. For example, the following symbols are
included in the Bit group: Bi-centered Bit, Core Bit, Mill, Natural
Diamond Bit, Polycrystalline Diamond Bit, Spear Bit, Thermally Stable
Diamond Bit, Tri-cone Bit, and Washover Bit.

Symbol Manager can be used to create any symbols used by your


Company that are not included with the default package of symbols
shipped with the PROFILE software.

6-2 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Using Symbol Manager

Symbol Manager offers two methods to create and edit symbols: Tree
Mode and Sketch Mode. Use the two tabs in the upper left corner of the
main Symbol Manager window to access either mode.

Tree Mode
and
Sketch Mode
Tabs

Symbol Manager Tabs—Drawing Mode Selection

Tree Mode uses a hierarchical tree, where sections and components


groups are added node by node. Properties for each section are changed
while viewing the results of each modification within the tab.

Sketch Mode allows tracing of existing images tocreate symbols andthe


ability to draw symbols by freehand.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-3


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Building Blocks for Symbol Manager


The building blocks for creating the symbols are drawing variations on
a simple cylinder.

A 3D cylinder is defined using a top and bottom outer diameter and a top
and bottom inner diameter together with a length. By varying these
parameters a number of different objects can be created.

Each cylinder is actually drawn using a number of rectangles. If enough


small rectangles are used, it results in the appearance of a smooth,
curved surface. The cylinders above were created using approximately
40 rectangles for each inner and outer surface. If the number of
rectangles is reduced, the cylinder begins to look less convincing.

The use of rectangles also allows for the creation of objects like nuts
and bolts.

6-4 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

If only a portion of the cylinder is drawn using the rectangles, it allows


for objects to be drawn in cutaway.

If the concept of using rectangles to draw cylinders is taken one step


further, multiple small cutaway sections can be created. These are useful
for features that repeat on the surface of a symbol.

Of course, these objects on their own do not make up a symbol for a


component, but when they are stacked together, one on top of the other,
in different configurations, the possibilities are limitless.

With the basic building blocks in place, a few more specialized features
have been included with Symbol Manager.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-5


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Modify Symbol Ends


The ends of the cylinder can be modified using a sine wave.

The slanted end on the symbol below (a mule shoe) is made in this way:

By applying two sine waves, a symbol representing a break can


be produced:

Creating Perforations or Holes


One further specialized feature is perforations or holes:

This can be modified by stretching out the holes into a slot:

6-6 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Creating Offset Pipes


Offset pipes are simple pipe sections offset from the center line and
repeated a number of times. By combining this feature with the ability
to specify how many sides the cylinder should be drawn, bottled or
flanged components such as the one shown below can be produced:

Building Symbols using Symbol Manager


Before symbols can be created, it is important to understand the shapes
and functionality that are the building blocks for Symbol Manager.

Simple symbols are easily created by affixing a number of sections one


on top of the other.

To create complex symbols, features must be added to the inside or


outside of sections of pipe. In order to accomplish this task, every
section of a symbol can have a list of component sections. These
component sections can be added to the inside or outside of the pipe
section or even made to protrude at an angle, sticking out of the side of
the pipe.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-7


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

In the case of the stabilizer shown below, the stabilizer blades are outer
components of the main section of pipe. The blades themselves are
created using the cutaway feature, repeated four times around the central
section of pipe.

The following example shows sections of cutaway cylinders as inner


components of the central section of pipe:

When you are armed with all these building blocks and tools, it is
possible to create some complex symbols. Even the drill bit is drawn
using the building blocks and tools available in Symbol Manager.

6-8 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbol Manager

Symbol Manager is used to create and manage symbols used by the


PROFILE software and other Engineer’s Desktop™ applications for use
in schematic drawings. It provides a comprehensive and customizable
editor for all types of downhole equipment and Well operation symbols,
including multidimensional symbols with cutaways.

The symbols are stored in small .PSY files that are organized using a
Symbol Map, which can be accessed in the Symbol Manager and the
PROFILE software. The Symbol Map maps the internal codes used by
the EDM™ applications to one of the symbol files (that is,
<symbolfilename>.psy).

Symbol Manager generates true 3D symbols using OpenGL® and


creates scaled engineering graphics.

Navigating Symbol Manager


As mentioned earlier, Symbol Manager consists of two tabs: Tree Mode
and Sketch Mode. The Tree Mode provides a detailed drawing
component editor where each component and subcomponent is defined
with attributes specific to the drawing component type. Drawing
components are organized using a component tree. Sketch Mode
provides a freehand drawing tool that enables the user to build a symbol
drawing on top of a display graphic image.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-9


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

A suggested workflow is to initially draw the basic symbol in Sketch


Mode, then fine-tune it in Tree Mode. The Tree Mode tab contains
functionality that the Sketch Mode does not, such as the ability to draw
offset pipes, bit teeth, and complex exterior components.

Symbol Menu Bar Main Toolbar


Properties Area

Preview
Area
Symbol
Preview
Area

Component
Properties Area

Symbol Section
Tree Area Properties Area

Tree Mode

6-10 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Menu Bar Main Toolbar

Symbol
View
(w/ 1/4
cutaway
applied

Sketch
Toolbar

Sketch
Area

Sketch Mode

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-11


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Menu Bar
This section lists and describes the Menu Bar functions in
Symbol Manager.

File
The following commands are available in the File menu: New, Open,
Close, Save, Save As, Create Thumbnails, Regenerate All Thumbnails,
Import, Print, Print Preview, Print Setup, Recent File, and Exit.

New
Use this command to create a new symbol.

Follow the menu path:

File > New

A New Symbol will appear in the Symbol Tree area.

Open
Use this command to open a symbol.

Follow the menu path:

File > Open

The Open dialog box displays. Within the dialog box, navigate to the
location of the symbol to be opened. Select the symbol and click OK.
Click Cancel to return to the Symbol Manager window without opening
a symbol.

Close
Use this command to close a symbol. Follow the menu path:

File > Close

6-12 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Save
Use this command to save the current symbol in the Symbol Tree Area
as a new symbol, or to update new edits to the loaded symbol. Follow
the menu path:

File > Save

The symbol that is currently displayed in the Symbol Tree area is saved.

Save As
Use this command to save the current symbol with a new name. Follow
the menu path:

File > Save As

When the Save As dialog box displays, enter a File Name and select the
location for the new file. Click Save to save the symbol in the selected
location. Click Cancel to return to the Symbol Manager window.

Create Thumbnails
Use this option to determine whether or not a thumbnail image is also
generated when you save a symbol. When this command is activated, a
check mark will appear next to the command in the menu. Thumbnails
are saved in *.PNG format in the same location as the .PSY file for the
symbol, and are required to browse the symbols in the Open dialog box.

Follow the menu path:

File > Create Thumbnails

Note

To view thumbnails in the Open dialog box, select Thumbnails from the View
Menu icon ( ) picklist.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-13


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

View Menu Button—Open Dialog Box

Regenerate All Thumbnails


Use this command to periodically regenerate all thumbnails as you add
symbols. Thumbnails are not automatically regenerated when symbols
are copied into the symbol folder, therefore you must regenerate them
on an occasional basis.

Follow the menu path:

File > Regenerate All Thumbnails

The Regenerate All Thumbnails option will load every symbol and
regenerate its thumbnail image. A best practice is to use this command
after you copy symbols directly into the symbol folder. Thumbnail
images can be generated either Full, Quarter Cutaway, and Half
Cutaway with the cascading menu commands.

Import
Use this command to import a symbol into Symbol Manager.

Follow the menu path:

File > Import

6-14 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The Import Symbols dialog box displays. For more information on the
Import Symbol dialog box, see page 6-73.

Print
Use this command to print the symbol currently displayed.

Follow the menu path:

File > Print

The Print dialog box displays.

Print Preview
Use this command to preview a symbol before printing.

Follow the menu path:

File > Print Preview

A Print Preview window displays.

Print Setup
Use this command to set the print parameters.

Follow the menu path:

File > Print Setup

The Print Setup dialog box displays. For more information on the Print
Setup dialog box, see Symbol Manager Help.

Recent File
Use this section of the File menu to view the most recently created or
displayed symbols.

Follow the menu path:

File > Recent File

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-15


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Exit
Use this command to exit Symbol Manager.

Follow the menu path:

File > Exit

Edit
The following commands are available in the Edit menu: Undo, Redo,
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Symbol Folders.

Undo
Use the Undo command to undo the last action.

Redo
Use the Redo command to perform the last action again.

Cut
Select an object (component) and use the Cut command to remove it
from the Symbol Manager.

Copy
Select an object (component) and use the Copy command to copy the
selected item to the Windows® Clipboard in preparation to paste it to
another location.

Paste
Select an object (component) and use the paste command to paste the
object currently in the Windows Clipboard to the selected location in the
Symbol Manager.

Symbol Folders
Use the Symbol Folders command to define the location of system and
user symbols on a local or network drive.

6-16 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Root Symbol Folders Area

System

Local or Network Drive location for symbols that ship with the
PROFILE software.

User (Local)

Local or Network Drive location for user symbols.

Sub Folders Area

Drillstring, Casing, Wellbore Equipment, Wellheads, and


Miscellaneous

Local or Network Drive location for categorized symbol subfolders.

View
The following commands are available in the View menu: Toolbar,
Status, and Options.

Toolbar
The Toolbar, located along the top of the main window in Symbol
Manager, can be hidden or displayed.

To show the Toolbar, follow the menu path:

View > Toolbar

A check mark displays next to the menu item Toolbar when the bar
is visible.

To hide the Toolbar, follow the same menu path:

View > Toolbar

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-17


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Status
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Symbol Manager main
window and can be hidden or displayed.

To show the Status Bar, follow the menu path:

View > Status Bar

There will be a check mark next to the menu item Status Bar when the
bar is visible.

To hide the Status Bar, follow the same menu path:

View > Status Bar

Options
An Options dialog box is available to set the parameters for the
automatic rotation for a symbol in the Symbol View area (see page 6-
30).

Select the Rotate check box to activate the rotation functionality once
the parameters have been set. Click Apply (at the bottom of the dialog
box) to see the symbol rotate in the Symbol View area based on the
current parameters.

Click the Reset Symbol button to move the symbol back to its original
view. This is the view available when a symbol is opened. This button
will not reset the values in the axis fields to zero as the values used for
rotation and the values used for the default view are not related.

Enter a value in the X-Axis field to set the parameters for horizontal (left
and right) movement.

Enter a value in the Y-Axis field to set the parameters for vertical (up
and down) movement.

Enter a value in the Z-Axis field to set the parameters for depth (forward
and backward) movement.

Once the options are entered, click OK to apply the parameters for each
axis and exit the Options dialog box. Click Apply to view the symbol
rotating in the Symbol View area without exiting the Options dialog
box. Click Cancel to return to the Symbol Manager main window.

6-18 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Window
The following commands are available in the Window menu: New
Window, Cascade, Tile, and Arrange Icons.

New Window
Use the New Window command in the Window menu to open a new
symbol in Symbol Manager.

Follow the menu path:

Window > New Window

Cascade
Use the Cascade command in the Window menu to arrange the open
symbols in a cascading format on the right side of the Symbol
Manager window.

Follow the menu path:

Window > Cascade

Tile
Use the Tile command in the Window menu to arrange the open
symbols in a tile format.

Follow the menu path:

Window > Tile

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-19


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Arrange Icons
Use the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu to arrange the
icons of any minimized windows to their default positions at the lower
left of the window or desktop. The icons will not be displayed in front
of other windows. For example, if you have another window covering
the lower left area, you will not see the icons.

The effects of this command are visible under the following conditions:

• The active window is not maximized.

• The icon area is not covered up.

• Some of the icons are not in their default locations, which begin at
the lower left edge of the application’s frame.

This command has no effect on non-minimized windows, nor does it


change the restored size and position of any windows.

To use this command:

Have one or more windows minimized, then follow the menu path:

Window > Arrange Icons.

Help
The following commands are available in the Help menu: Contents and
About Symbol Manager.

Contents
Use this command to view the contents of Symbol Manager Help.

Follow the menu path:

Help > Contents

About Symbol Manager


To access the About Symbol Manager dialog box, follow the menu path:

Help > About Symbol Manager

6-20 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The About Symbol Manager dialog box appears.

This dialog box displays general information about the application,


including the version and release numbers, build number, and
copyright information.

The Application Information area of the dialog box displays the user and
Company name (taken from the registry, which is set when the
application is installed).

Click OK to close the About dialog box.

Click System Info to open the Windows System information window,


which displays PC and operating system parameters. This information
can be useful when contacting Landmark® Support.

Main Toolbar
The following icons are available in the Symbol Manager Main toolbar:

Icon Name Description

New Click this icon to start creating a new symbol.

Open Click this icon to open a symbol.

Save Click this icon to save the symbol


currently displayed.

Undo Click this icon to return the image to the state


prior to the last action. This function is only
available from Sketch Mode.

Redo Click this icon to return the image to the state


prior to the last action. This icon is only
available from Sketch Mode.

Cut Click this icon to cut or delete the


selected information.

Copy Click this icon to place selected information on


the Windows Clipboard.

Paste Click this icon to place the information


currently in the Windows Clipboard into the
selected location.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-21


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Icon Name Description

Print Click this icon to access the Print dialog box.

Shape Click this icon to fill in the shape in the


Preview area.

Outline Click this icon to outline the shape (no fill,


black and white) in the Preview area.

Shape + Outline Click this icon to outline and fill the shape in
the Preview area.

Highlight Click this icon to turn on the highlight (grid)


around the object currently selected in the
Symbol Tree area. The highlight will be seen in
the Preview area

Smooth IDs Click this icon to smooth the inner diameters of


the main part of the symbol. This will help
even out the inner and outer lines of
the symbol.

Import Click this icon to import a symbol from a


DIMS Profile symbol file (see page 6-73).

Symbol Map Click this icon to access the Symbol Mappings


dialog box (see page 6-75).

Auto-rotate Symbol Click this icon to allow the symbol to rotate in


the Symbol View area.

Help Click this icon to access the online help for the
Symbol Manager.

6-22 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Tree Mode Tab


The Tree Mode tab is used to create and edit symbols using a component
tree and several symbol properties areas.

Symbol Menu Bar Main Toolbar


Properties Area

Preview
Area
Symbol
Preview
Area

Component
Properties Area

Symbol Section
Tree Area Properties Area

Tree Mode

Symbol Properties Area


This section contains the name, description and manufacturer names for
the symbol and also the values for the symbol’s inner and
outer diameters.

Enter a Name for the symbol in this field. Use the Description field to
enter any pertinent information that helps describe the symbol or
its origins.

Enter the Manufacturer of the component if applicable.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-23


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

In order for the symbol to scale properly, it must have the Inner
Diameter (ID) and Outer Diameter (OD) specified correctly in the
Symbol Properties.

In the OpenWells® software, the Body OD and Body ID fields are


entered for an assembly component. The symbols Outer and Inner
diameter are the symbols equivalent of these values. Enter the Body OD
and Body ID of the symbol using the same units used for the entry of the
symbol.

Units
Any units can be used. All the symbols are scaled at run-time to reflect
the data they are displaying. As long as the symbol has its outer and
inner diameters specified using the same units with which it was
entered, then the software can scale it properly.

Note

One proven technique for transferring a symbol from a drawing to the Symbol
Manager is to print it out and take measurements with a ruler directly from the
drawing. All the values are entered using centimeters or inches.

Symbol Tree Area


The Symbol Tree area is where all the sections of the symbol are
displayed in a hierarchical list. Each item in the tree represents either an
individual section of the symbol or a Component group. In the case of a
Component group, the group item simply provides a way of gathering
Component sections below the parent section.

Copy And Paste


It is possible to copy and paste any item in the tree using the right-click
menu. The copy is available application-wide, which makes it possible
to copy sections or entire symbols.

6-24 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Renaming Items
An item in the tree can be renamed by clicking it to select it and then
clicking again.

Alternatively, press F2 to edit the name of the currently selected item.

The root item cannot be edited in the tree. It always displays the symbol
name as entered in the Symbol Properties area section above the tree.

Deleting
An item in the tree can be deleted using the right-click menu option or
by pressing Delete.

Confirmation is needed before the item will be deleted—“Are you sure


you wish to delete this part of the symbol?” Click Yes to delete the item
or No to return to the Symbol Manager main window.

Once an item has been deleted, it cannot be undone.

Symbol Tree Right-click Menu


The following commands are available in the Symbol Tree area of the
Symbol Manager main window by using the right-click option: Add,
Rotate, Gradient Adjust, Copy, Paste, Rename, and Delete.

Add
Use this option to insert a selected section into the symbol. The
following sections can be added: Pipe, Perforated Pipe, Slotted Pipe,
Slotted Pipe (Flat ends), Cutaway, Offset, Break (Top), Break (Bottom),
and Invisible.

This option can also be used to add the following to a symbol: Outer
Component, Inner Component, and Angled Component.

Rotate
Use this option to rotate a symbol. For more information, see “Rotate
Dialog Box” on page 6-31.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-25


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Gradient Adjust
Use this option to adjust the gradient in a symbol. This option will only
appear in the right-click menu when a component is selected in the tree.
The component can be an Outer Component, Inner Component, or an
Angled Component. For more information, see “Gradient Dialog Box”
on page 6-32.

Copy
Use this option to copy a portion of the symbol into the
Windows Clipboard.

Paste
Use this option to paste information stored in the Windows Clipboard
into the selected location.

Rename
Use this option to rename a node in the Symbol Tree.

Delete
Use this option to delete a selected item from the Symbol Tree.

Preview Area
The preview window shows the symbol exactly as it will appear in a
schematic drawing.

A larger drawing of the symbol can be seen in the Symbol View in solid,
three-quarter, or half cutaway views at the bottom right of the
application window.

Preview Toolbar
There are three toolbar icons located above the preview window that are
used to select how the symbol is drawn:

• Shape displays the symbol shape with no outline.

• Outline displays the symbol outline only in grayscale color.

6-26 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

• Shape + Outline displays the symbol with outline and shape.

The default setting for the preview area is Shape + Outline.

Component Properties Area


It is possible to shift, rotate and incline component sections relative to
their parent section. If no component sections are created for a symbol,
this area will be greyed out. The Component Properties section contains
the following controls:

Note

Only the Distance field is available for inner and outer component sections. The
rest are for angled component sections, that is, Pipes that stick out the side of the
initial section.

• Distance

This is the distance starting from the top of the initial section to draw
all the component sections. This value can be negative if it should
start above the initial section.

• Rotation

This is the rotation around the initial section and is only relevant if
the component sections are inclined as well.

• From Center

This determines how far away from the center of the initial pipe the
component sections will start.

• Incline

This is the inclination of the component sections relative to the


initial section.

Section Properties Area


These are the properties of the current section (selected in the tree). The
Section Type selection determines which of the edit boxes are available.
If a Component group item is selected in the tree, then the edit boxes will
affect all sections in that group.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-27


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The Type field denotes the type of section. This affects which of the edit
boxes are available and also what some of the boxes do. For more
information on types, see Symbol Manager Help.

Select the Expandable check box to mark a section expandable. This


will allow the section to stretch to fit tightly inside the casing on the
schematic drawing. This option is designed to be used on the rubber
seals for Packer symbols to ensure they always appear correctly
on diagrams.

Select the Control Line check box to draw a control line to the surface
from an angled component pipe. Only sections of angled component
pipes can be marked as control lines. These are for symbols that need to
have a hydraulic or electrical control line drawn to the surface. Simply
add a small section of pipe (an angled component) sticking out the side
of the symbol and mark it as a control line. When the schematic is drawn
using this symbol, a control line to surface will be added. Multiple
control lines may be present in a symbol.

Use the Top OD and ID, Bottom OD and ID fields to enter the correct
inside and outside diameter for both the top and bottom of the section
being created.

Use the Length field to enter the length of the section being created.

The All Diameters control allows all the diameters to be modified by


the same amount at one time. Useful for scaling sections.

Use the Sides field to set the number of sides used to draw the cylinder.
This is useful for creating non-round features. If the value is set to 0,
then the default based upon the current quality setting will be used.

Features Area
The Features area is located within the Section Properties area. If the
section type is anything but a standard solid pipe or an invisible section,
then the value in the No. field specifies the number to draw of whatever
feature was selected.

Use the Start Angle field to allow the features to be rotated at an


arbitrary angle around the center point.

6-28 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The End Angle is available for cutaways so that the cutaway features
can be slanted. An example of slanted cutaway features are present in
this stabilizer.

Use the Hole Diameter field for the perforated and slotted section types
and specify the diameter of the hole or slot.

The Slot Length field is only available for slots. This is the length of
the slot.

The Inner Span and Outer Span options are only available for
cutaways. These specify the length of the inside and outside of each
cutaway section. The values are entered in degrees (0 - 360).

The Offset Radius field is only available for offset pipes and specifies
how far from the center point to spread them out.

If the root item in the tree is selected, then this Color selection grid will
change the base color of the entire symbol. Any section in the symbol
that has the same color as this base color will also change when the base
color is changed.

Note

The base color can also be changed for each symbol selected in the symbol map.

If a component group item is selected in the tree, then the color picker
will change the color for all the component sections one level below it.

Use the Dull/Shiny option to adjust the shininess of a section or sections


using the slider control.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-29


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbol View Area


The Symbol View area is a 3D drawing of the symbol displayed in both
the Tree and Sketch tabs. It can be rotated and zoomed by dragging the
mouse over it while holding down the left or right buttons. In Sketch
Mode, the inner and outer features display and refresh dynamically
while you draw.

Tree Mode Sketch Mode

Symbol View Area Displayed in Tree and Sketch Mode

Quality (Tree Mode only)


The Quality slider above the Symbol View area determines how many
sides are used to draw the cylinders. Better quality means more sides and
hence a smoother cylinder. The trade-off is that it may slow down the
drawing of the symbol, especially if it is a complex symbol.

The default is to draw one side for every 10 degrees. As a result, the
default is 36 sides per cylinder.

Note

The Quality option selected is remembered when the application closes.

6-30 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Lighting (Tree Mode only)


The Lighting slider adjusts the brightness of the light shining on the
symbol, from dark to light. It is there purely for aesthetic reasons while
the symbol is being designed. The brightness is not saved or used
elsewhere in the application.

Note

The Lighting option selected is remembered when the application closes.

Cutaway
Below the symbol view are three cutaway buttons. The 1/4 and 1/2 cut
buttons display the inner sections of the symbol and allow an interior
view to add inner features.

Background Color
The last button selects the background color for the symbol view.

Note

The Background Color selected is remembered when the application closes.

Rotate and Magnify Symbols


Left-click and hold the symbol within the Preview area, then move the
cursor to rotate the object.

Right-click and hold the symbol within the Preview area, then move the
cursor down to zoom in, or up to zoom out.

Rotate Dialog Box


The Rotate dialog box is available using the right-click menu in the
Symbol Tree.

Right-click an item within the Symbol Tree and select the


Rotate... command.

The Rotate dialog box will display.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-31


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Enter a value in the Change in Angle field or use the up and down
arrows to select a value between -360 and 360 degrees.

Click OK to apply the degree of rotation to the symbol and return to the
Symbol Manager window.

Click Apply to apply the degree of rotation to the symbol without


leaving the Rotation dialog box.

Click Cancel to reset the degree of rotation to its state before the
Rotation dialog box displayed.

Gradient Dialog Box


The Gradient dialog box allows for a change in diameter from top to
bottom for a component section (Inner Component, Outer Component,
or Angled Component) within a symbol.

Enter a numeric value in the Change in Diameter field.

Note

Components contained within the selected component section reflect the Change in
Diameter proportionately.

Click OK to accept the diameter entered and return to the Symbol


Manager main window.

Click Apply to see the effect of the change in diameter in the Symbol
View Area.

Click Cancel to return to the Symbol Manager main window with no


diameter changes.

Tree Mode Tutorials


Use the following tutorials to help you understand how to create
symbols in Tree Mode. Each tutorial builds upon knowledge of the
techniques used in the previous, therefore it is recommended you
complete them sequentially.

6-32 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Building a Stabilizer in Tree Mode


This tutorial outlines the steps necessary to create a stabilizer symbol
using Symbol Manager in Tree Mode.

Start the Symbol Manager (Start > Programs > Landmark Engineer's
Desktop 5000.1.7 > Tools > Symbol Manager). The application opens
with a new symbol created by default. From the Symbol Tree, select the
Pipe Section.

Set the base color for the Stabilizer symbol. This color will be used for
all new sections added to the tree.

Note

The base color can also be changed in the PROFILE software using the
symbol map.

• Click the root item in the tree (New Symbol).


• Use the color selector at the bottom of the Symbol Properties area to select red.

Once the symbol is finished, the base color can be changed by selecting the root
item and using the color selector in the Symbol Properties area to select a new color.
Any section in the symbol that was using the previous base color is changed to the
new base color.

A section of red pipe displays in the Symbol View area and will be the
main body of the stabilizer.

Stabilizer Body

To attach stabilizer components to theoutside of the main pipe, an Outer


Component must be added to the Pipe Section. When this command is
used, the component sections will be positioned on the outside of the
pipe relative to the pipe’s start point.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-33


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Right-click the Pipe Section tree item and select the Add > Outer
Component. An Outer Component and Pipe Section are added to the
tree beneath the original Pipe Section.

The Outer Component item is the component group item and the second
Pipe Section item in the Symbol Tree is the first section in the
component group. The symbol now consists of an initial pipe section
with a component pipe wrapped around the outside of it.

Rename the component section to Stabilizer. Click the Outer


Component item and press F2. Change the item’s name to Stabilizers.

Select the Pipe Section item beneath Stabilizers and use the Section
Properties Area to change the Type to Cutaway and the Length to 1.0.
The symbol display changes.

Cutaway Added to Pipe Section

6-34 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Click and hold the symbol in the Symbol View area, and a white cursor
appears over the symbol. Use your mouse to turn to object to the side to
view the first part of the stabilizer:

Rotating the Side View of


Pipe Section Cutaway

Rotating Stabilizer to View the Cutaway

The small section attached to the side of the pipe is the first component
of the stabilizer.

With the Stabilizer Pipe Section still selected, use the Section Properties
Area to change the Top Outer Diameter (OD) to 3.1 and the Bottom
Outer Diameter (OD) to 4. This produces the slant for the top of
the stabilizer.

Enter an Inner Span of 40 degrees and an Outer Span of 10 degrees to


expand the cutaway inner and outer span values. These values are
entered in degrees ranging from 0 to 360.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-35


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Use the color selector to change the color of the Stabilizer Pipe Section
to gray so that it stands out against the red pipe. The Section Properties
area should look as follows:

Section Properties

The stabilizer requires four sections like the one just created. In the
Features area, enter 4 in the No. field to indicate the number of cutaway
sections required. The symbol should now resemble the diagram below:

Multiple Cutaway Sections

To add the next section of the stabilizer, right-click the Stabilizer Pipe
Section and select the Add > Cutaway command.

Note

The Symbol Manager utility bases the values for the new sub-component on the
previous sub-component to determine the values to be used for the new section.

In the Section Properties area, change the Length to 2.

6-36 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

To complete the stabilizers, another cutaway section (a reverse of the


first section) must be added. With the Cutaway Feature component
selected, right-click and select the Add > Cutaway command. Set its
Length to 1 and the Bottom Outer Diameter (OD) to 3.1.

The Symbol Tree area should look like this:

The symbol in the Symbol View area should look like this:

To finish the symbol, the component sections must be centered on the


pipe. Click the Stabilizers component group and set the Distance value
in the Component Properties area to 0.5.

Component
Properties
Area

Component Properties Area

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-37


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Changing the Distance value will move all of the sub-components of the
stabilizer symbol down 0.5 units down on the initial pipe section.

All items in the Symbol tree should be renamed to make it easier to find
specific parts of a symbol for editing at a later date.

The Symbol Name can be changed using the Name field in the Symbol
Properties area. Enter the Name (the new name displays in the Symbol
Tree), Description, and Manufacturer information. This information
can be viewed within the PROFILE software by double-clicking any
symbol in a schematic.

To rename the section, component, and sub-components, right-click


each item, select Rename, and enter the new name.

The Symbol must be saved to the symbols folder (use the File > Save
command). The location automatically defaults to the symbols folder
that was created during the installation of Symbol Manager.

Note

If the symbol is not placed in the symbols folder, it will not be usable by the symbol
map and therefore not available in the PROFILE software. Map the stabilizer
component code to this new stabilizer using the Symbol Map.

6-38 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Click the Symbol Map icon ( ). The Symbol Mappings dialog box
displays. Select Stabilizer from the mapping picklist. A list of Stabilizer
symbols displays in the Mapping List. Select the symbol to be mapped
to the new symbol. In the Symbol Area, select the symbol from the
picklist.

New Image Displayed in Symbol Mappings Dialog Box

Click Save to save this mapping to the default symbol map, or click
Save As to save the mapping to a new symbol map.

Adding Threads to a Symbol in Tree Mode


This tutorial outlines the steps necessary to add threads to a symbol
using the Symbol Manager in Tree Mode. The threads created using the
Symbol Manager will not be true spiralling threads, but they provide a
good visual representation of threads. In this tutorial, the threads will be
added to a simple piece of pipe. This method can be applied to any
existing symbol.

The threads will be added as an Inner Component (that is, a feature on


the inside of the pipe). The gradient adjust feature will be used to taper
the threads at the end of the pipe.

Start the Symbol Manager (Start > Programs > Landmark Engineer's
Desktop 5000.1.7 > Tools > Symbol Manager). The application opens
with a new symbol created by default. The default symbol is a generic
length of pipe. From the Symbol Tree, select the Pipe Section and
shorten the Length to 2.00. Click the ½ Cut button so that the inside of
the pipe can be seen.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-39


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Click and hold the symbol to turn the object slightly, allowing you to see
more of the symbol. The symbol should now look like this:

To create the threads inside the pipe, right-click the Pipe Section in the
Symbol Tree area and select the Add > Inner Component command.

The defaults for the inner component section define a piece of pipe
inside the parent that also stretches the full length of the parent section.
This inner Component section will be the start of the threads. The
symbol should now look like this:

6-40 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Use the color selector in the Section Properties area to change the color
of the Inner Component item to grey so that it stands out against the
pipe. Change the value in the Length field to 0.2 and the both the Top
Inner Diameter (ID) and the Bottom Inner Diameter (ID) to 2.4. The
symbol should now look like this:

Now the first ridge of the thread must be added. Ensure that the Inner
Component is selected and add another section of pipe. This will create
a copy of the first section of pipe created. Use the Section Properties area
to change the Length field to 0.1 and adjust both the Top Inner
Diameter (ID) and the Bottom Inner Diameter (ID) to 2.3. This creates
the first ridge in the threads:

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-41


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

To create a valley to the other side of the ridge, right-click the Pipe
Section in the Symbol Tree and follow the menu path: Add > Pipe.
From the Section Properties area, adjust both the Top Inner Diameter
(ID) and the Bottom Inner Diameter (ID) to 2.4.

Rename the ridges and valleys to make them easier to identify in the
Symbol Tree. Click the first Pipe Section under the Inner Component
group and press F2. Change the component’s name to Ridge. Select the
second Pipe Section item, press F2, and change the component’s name
to Valley.

The Symbol Tree should now appear as follows:

Now the rest of the threads can be added using some shortcuts.
Right-click the Ridge item in the Symbol Tree area and select Copy
from the submenu that displays.

Right-click the Valley item and select Paste from the submenu that
displays. There are now two ridges in the symbol:

6-42 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Repeat the pasting process seven more times. The symbol will now look
like this:

The valleys must be added for the inner component to resemble threads.

Right-click the Valley item in the Symbol Tree area and select Copy
from the submenu that appears. Right-click each Ridge item in the
Symbol Tree and select Paste from the submenu that appears. The
symbol will now look like this:

The final step in creating the threads inside the section of pipe is to taper
the threads so that they are slightly narrower towards the bottom of the
symbol. Right-click the Inner Component item in the Symbol Tree and
select Gradient Adjust from the submenu that displays.

The Gradient dialog box displays:

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-43


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

In the Change in Diameter field, enter the change in diameter


necessary between the top and the bottom of the threads. For this
tutorial, taper the bottom of the threads in by -0.30. Click OK to return
to the main Symbol Manager screen. The symbol will now look like this:

Select the Pipe Section item in the Symbol Tree and change the Bottom
Inside Diameter (ID) to 2.2 to match the bottom of the threads. The
complete threaded piece of pipe will look like this:

Enter a new name for the symbol (for example, Threaded Pipe) in the
Name field of the Symbol Properties area.

Creating Packers and Seals in Tree Mode


This tutorial outlines the steps necessary to create a simple packer in the
Symbol Manager using Tree Mode. You also learn that symbol sections
can be given special properties to either indicate that they are the
expandable seal of a packer or that they represent the end of a
control line.

It is assumed that you completed the tutorials “Building a Stabilizer in


Tree Mode” on page 6-33 and “Adding Threads to a Symbol in Tree
Mode” on page 6-39 and are familiar with the basics of adding pipe
sections and creating component sections.

6-44 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Start by creating a new symbol. Follow the menu path: File > New. Set
the base color for the symbol to red using the color selector located in
the Section Properties area.

Add two more sections of pipe to the default pipe. Adjust the values for
each of the sections as follows:

Pipe Section Top and Top and Length


Bottom OD Bottom ID

First Pipe Section 3.0 2.0 2.0

Second Pipe Section 2.2 2.0 1.0

Third Pipe Section 3.0 2.0 2.0

If viewed in 1/4 Cut, the symbol should currently look like this:

Select the middle pipe section and add an outer component section to it.
Right-click the Pipe Section and follow the menu path: Add > Outer
Component. Change the Length of the new section to 0.2 and use the
color selector to make the section black. Adjust the Bottom OD to 3.2.
If the zoom command is used, the outer Component section should
appear like this in the symbol:

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-45


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Add another pipe section and set the Length to 0.6.

Add one more pipe section and set the Length to 0.2 and the
Bottom OD to 2.64.

The Outer Component sections can be renamed to more accurately


reflect their function in the symbol:

The Outer Component, a seal within the packer, must be made


expandable so that it will scale to fit tightly inside the casing when
drawn on a schematic.

6-46 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

This is done by selecting each of the three sections and selecting the
Expandable check box in the Section Properties area.

This packer needs two more seals added to it and this can be done by
copying and pasting the one seal already created.

Right-click the Pipe Section to which the Outer Component belongs and
select Copy from the submenu that displays.

Right-click the same section of pipe and select Paste from the submenu
that displays. There are now two seals in the packer symbol.

Add one more seal to the packer using the copy and paste method. The
symbol should now look like this:

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-47


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

This symbol will now appear in a schematic with the seals expanded to
touch the inside of the casing.

Complete the packer by adding threads to the first Pipe Section in the
symbol. Follow the menu path File > Open to open the symbol created
in the Adding Threads to a Symbol tutorial (Threaded Pipe).

Right-click the thread’s component section and select Copy from the
submenu that displays.

Return to the packer symbol using the menu path: Window > <Symbol
Name>. Right-click the first Pipe Section in the symbol and select Paste
from the submenu that displays. The threads, as seen below, are partially
obscured as they are now embedded in the pipe:

Select the component section for the threads and use the All Diameters
field located in the Section Properties area to shrink the threads until the
outside of the bottom of the threads matches the inside of the bottom of
the outer pipe section (a change of -0.2).

Tip

Use the Rotate (left-click) and Magnify (right-click) functionality in the Symbol
View area to get a closer look at portions of the symbol.

6-48 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Adjust the inside of the top of the outer pipe section to match the outside
of the top of the threads. Select the first Pipe Section item in the Inner
Component and note the Top OD. If the threads from the previous
tutorial (see “Adding Threads to a Symbol in Tree Mode” on page 6-39)
are used, this value is 2.3.

Select the Pipe Section above the Inner Component and enter the noted
value (2.3) for the Top ID. The completed packer with threads should
look like this:

Change the name of the symbol. Enter a new name (for example,
Threaded 3 Seal Packer) in the Name field of the Symbol
Properties area.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-49


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Sketch Mode Tab


The Sketch Mode tab is used to create and edit symbols on the fly with
an easy to use graphical interface.

The following four tabs are located on the Sketch Mode tab and are
referenced later in this section of the chapter:

• Image

• Profile

• Outer Features

• Inner Features

Menu Bar Main Toolbar

Symbol
View
Area
(w/ 1/4
cutaway
applied

Sketch
Toolbar

Sketch
Area

Sketch Mode Tab

6-50 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Sketch Mode Toolbars


There are two different toolbar layouts in Sketch Mode. The Image tab
toolbar varies from the other tab toolbars, as seen below:

Image Tab

Icon Name Description

Open Opens a background image to trace.

None Clear Removes the current background image.

Rotate Left Rotates the current background image 90 degrees


counter-clockwise.

Rotate Right Rotates the current background image 90 degrees


clockwise.

Zoom In Enlarges the image view.


Note: Zoom does not resize the symbol.

Zoom Out Reduces the image view.


Note: Zoom does not resize the symbol.

None Reset Resets the image to original size and position.

Profile, Outer Features, and Inner Features Tabs

Icon Name Description

Delete Deletes all sections when editing symbol


profile features.

Delete All Deletes all outer or inner sections when editing


outer or inner features.

Smooth ID Resets the ID to uniform dimensions.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-51


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Icon Name Description

Zoom In Enlarges the symbol view.


Note: Zoom does not resize the
background images.

Zoom Out Reduces the symbol view.


Note: Zoom does not resize the
background images.

None Reset Resets the symbol view.

Paint Applies color to symbol sections.

Color Selects color from a palette to apply to


symbol sections.

Pick Click this icon to quickly pick an existing color


from the symbol view to apply to
symbol sections.

Paint All Applies a color to apply to all symbol sections.

None Component Type Click this icon to select the type of section to
draw from a picklist.

Properties View the properties of the selected


symbol section.

Edit Click this icon to edit a selected symbol section.


For more information, see “Editing Sections” on
page 6-54

6-52 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbol View Area


The Symbol View area is a 3D drawing of the symbol displayed in both
the Tree and Sketch tabs. For more information, see “Symbol View
Area” on page 6-30.

Symbol View Area Displayed in Sketch Mode

Sketch Area
The Sketch area displays the active photo image or symbol. If the active
object is a symbol, sections will display in the Sketch area. Image files
loaded remain in the background to assist the sketch process by enabling
the user to sketch around the outside and inside profiles of the symbol.

Sketch Area

The Sketch Area is a drawing pad where you can quickly create the basic
shape of symbols with a mouse. Think of it as a place to roughly sketch
most symbols, although some symbols can be created entirely in
Sketch Mode.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-53


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Section Types
This picklist is available from the Type button in the Profile, Outer
Features, and Inner Features tabs of Sketch Mode. For more information
on Section types, see Symbol Manager Help.

Sketch Mode Editing


Sketch Mode contains four tabs: Image, Profile, Outer Features, and
Inner Features. On each tab, there are buttons associated with the
processes needed to create and edit symbols.

• Image Tab—use this tab to load the background image file


for tracing

• Profile Tab—use this tab to trace the body profile of the symbol

• Outer Features Tab—use this tab to trace the external features of


the symbol (for example: Packer elements, slips)

• Inner Features Tab—use this tab to trace the inner profile (ID) of
the symbol

For details about the button functionality associated with each tab, see
“Image Tab” and “Profile, Outer Features, and Inner Features Tabs” on
page 6-51. Additional features found on the Sketch Mode tabs are
discussed below.

Editing Sections
Use Edit to configure sections while in Sketch Mode that were
previously drawn.

Mouseover the section in the Sketch Area. The sections will highlight
with a border and the cursor will change to .

Click the section to edit. The Section Properties dialog box displays.

6-54 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Modify the section properties as needed, then click OK to save the


changes. If needed, click Cancel to abort the properties edit.

Note

Grab and drag edit points to straighten sections and to clean up the symbol’s profile,
outer, and inner features. The example below represents a drag of the edit point
from one location to another. Notice that the cursor changes to a circle around the
edit point during mouseover. Left-click and hold (grab) the edit point and drag it to
another location or slightly move it to make minor alterations to the section.

Grab
and
drag

Dragging an Edit Point

Hover the cursor over the line, press Ctrl, and click the line segment to
add an edit point. When Ctrl is pressed, the cursor changes into a
crosshair with a broken line next to it ( ). Move the cursor over the
line segment until it changes to ( ), then position the center of the
cursor at the location where the edit point will be added. When the
cursor is positioned at the point you desire, left-click the mouse to add
the edit point. Next, hover over the new edit point and drag it to the
desired position. Continue adding edit points until the line segment is
modified to the desired appearance.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-55


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The figure below shows an edit point added to a single-segment line,


which was then modified to create a two-segment line.

Edit Point

Grab and
Drag

Splitting a Segment

Section Properties Dialog Box


The Section Properties dialog box is used in Sketch Mode, much like the
Section Properties Area in the Tree Mode. This dialog box is available
from the Profile, Outer Features, and Inner Features tab. To access this
dialog box, click theProperties icon ( ) when a section is active. Use
the Section Properties dialog box to configure the active section while
drawing in Sketch Mode. Each section type has specific properties
which may or may not be edited, depending on the type. Invisible
section properties can not be edited.

Type

Displays the active section type in Sketch Mode. This field cannot
be changed.

6-56 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Expandable (All types except Invisible)

Check this box if the section is expandable, such as you would find in
packer boots, expandable solid tubulars, and expandable liner hangars.

Features Area

Not all properties are editable for any given section type. The Section
Properties dialog box displays only the properties associated with the
active section type. All property fields for each section type are shown
below, with the editable fields enabled for each section type
in parenthesis.

No. (All sections except Pipe and Invisible)

Enter the number of slots, perforations, and cutaways (as applicable).

Start (All sections except Invisible)

Enter the start position of the section relative to plus or minus 0 to


360 degrees.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-57


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

End Angle (Cutaway)

The End Angle is available for cutaways so that the features can be
slanted. An example of slanted cutaway features are present in
this stabilizer.

Slanted Cutaway
seen in Stabilizer
blade

Example of Slanted Cutaway

For cutaway sections, the start and end angles are a rotation around the
inner pipe for the top and bottom of the section. If both rotations are the
same, the section looks vertical:

Cutaway—No Rotation

6-58 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

If the end angle is 20 degrees more than the start angle, it skews the
section around the pipe:

Single Blade (Cutaway)—Skewed Rotation

In the example below, you see a welded blade stabilizer. Notice the
multiple cutaway sections, each skewed a few degrees. To skew
multiple cutaway sections, enter the end angle of the preceding section
as the start angle of the next section. Each subsequent section will be
skewed by the same amount if the start angle is the end angle value of
the previous section.

Multiple Blades (Cutaway)—Skewed Rotation

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-59


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Inner (Cutaway)

Sets the inner span angle of the inner cutaway face between 0 and
360 degrees The example below shows an inner span of 10 degrees and
an outer span of 20 degrees.

Inner Span Cutaway

Outer Span (Cutaway)

Sets the outer span angle of the outer cutaway face between 0 and
360 degrees The example below shows an inner span of 20 degrees and
an outer span of 10 degrees.

Outer Span Cutaway

Hole Diam (Perforated, Slotted, and Slotted Flat Ends)

Sets the diameter of the holes for perforated and slotted sections.

Slot Length (Slotted and Slotted Flat Ends)

Sets the length of the slots for slotted and slotted flat end sections.

6-60 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Sketch Mode Tutorials


Up to this point, you have become familiar with the basic layout of the
Sketch Mode tab in Symbol Manager. Now you will practice drawing
symbols with the following tutorials.

Freehand Sketch of a Basic Symbol


The Sketch Mode tab overcomes the text entry limitations of the Tree
Mode tab. It is possible to freehand sketch the basic shape of a symbol,
including exterior and interior features. The following example will start
with a blank image area and build the basis of a flanged joint, which can
be enhanced further in Tree Mode:

If the default image is not loaded, select File > New or click the New
icon ( ).

Select the Sketch Mode tab.

Select the Profile tab, then click the Delete icon ( ) and click Yes on
the confirmation dialog box to clear the Sketch Area.

From the Type picklist, select Pipe Section.

Mouse over the Sketch Area to the left of centerline and notice that the
cursor changes to a crosshair ( ). The cursor is designed so the point
is the exact pixel location of the edit point to assist in precise line
placement. While drawing, the point is not obscured by the line
being drawn.

Note

The Sketch Area is divided by a dark vertical line in the middle. The cursor is active
left of the line, where editing is possible.

Click the Color icon ( ) to choose a color for the pipe section from
the color palette.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-61


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Left-click slightly left of centerline to insert an edit point. Sections are


drawn vertically and the next edit point must be inserted below or at the
same level as the previous edit point.

Note

Grab and drag edit points to straighten sections and to clean up the symbol’s profile,
outer, and inner features. The example below represents a drag of the edit point
from one location to another. Notice that the cursor changes to a circle around the
edit point during mouseover. Left-click and hold (grab) the edit point and drag it to
another location or slightly move it to make minor alterations to the section.

Grab
and
drag

To add edit points to line segments, hover the cursor over the line and
press Ctrl. When Ctrl is pressed, the cursor changes into a crosshair
with a broken line next to it . Move the cursor over the line segment
until it changes to , then position the center of the cursor at the
location where the edit point will be added. When the cursor is
positioned at the point you desire, left-click the mouse to add the edit
point. Next, hover over the new edit point and drag it to the desired
position. Continue adding edit points until the line segment is modified
to the desired appearance.

6-62 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The figure below shows an edit point added to a single-segment line,


which was then modified to create a two-segment line.

Edit Point

Grab and
Drag

Left-click to the left of the initial edit point to add another edit point.

CAUTION!

The Smooth ID icon ( ) will apply the ID setting saved in the Tree Mode tab
Symbol Properties area. If you want to smooth the ID, do so early in symbol
creation to avoid the application of additional edits.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-63


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Use the example below to create the pipe. Switch from Pipe Section to
Invisible (and back again) from the Type picklist to draw the gap used
for later placement of each flange.

Start
Pipe
Section

Start
Invisibl
e

Start
Pipe
Section

End
Pipe
Section

The symbol should appear as follows in the color selected:

Select the Outer Features tab, then click the Color icon ( ) to choose
a color for the flange from the color palette.

6-64 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Use the example below to create the flange. Switch from Pipe Section
to Invisible (and back again) from the Type picklist to draw the gap for
a gasket.

Start
Pipe
Section
Start
Invisible

Start
Pipe
End Section
Pipe
Section

The symbol should appear as follows in the color selected:

Select the Inner Features tab, then click the Color icon ( ) to choose
a color for the gasket from the color palette.

Repeat the previous sketch techniques to draw a gasket between the


flange faces, then Save the symbol.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-65


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

The basis for a flange fitting is now ready for refinement. Add fasteners
to the symbol with the Offset Pipes option in Tree Mode. When finished,
the flange connection should appear similar to the following:

Trace Sketch of a Basic Symbol


It is possible to trace the outline of an existing image, such as a photo
from the field, and create a symbol of the image. Supported graphic files
that can be opened include:

Drawing Interchange Format (.DXF) Portable Network Graphic (.PNG)

Graphics Interchange Format (.GIF) Tag Image File (.TIF)

Icons (.ICO) Truevision Targa Graphic (.TGA)

Joint Photographic Experts Group (.JPEG) Windows Bitmap (.BMP)

PC Paintbrush Bitmap (.PCX) Windows Meta File (.WMF)

The following example uses a packer in Drawing Interchange Format


(.DXF), normally associated with AutoCAD®, and traces the image to
create a symbol:

Note

Images must be vertical or horizontal due to rotation limitations.

6-66 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Select File > New or click the New icon ( ). The default symbol
is loaded.

Select the Sketch Mode tab.

Select the Profile tab, then click the Delete icon ( ) and click Yes on
the confirmation dialog box to clear the Sketch Area.

Select the Image tab, then click the Open icon ( ) and select an
image file to trace.

Click Open to display the image in the Sketch Area.

Cursor Centerline

Notes

• The Sketch Area is divided by a dark vertical line (centerline) in the center. The
cursor is active left of centerline, where editing is possible.
• More than one image can be loaded into the Sketch Area. Click the Open button
repeatedly if multiple images will be used to construct the symbol.

Mouse over the image in the Sketch Area and notice the cursor changes
to a four-sided arrow ( ). Left-click and hold (grab) the image to
drag and center the image on the dark vertical line located in the middle
of the Sketch Area. Click the Rotate Left ( ) or Rotate Right ( )
icons to turn the image 90 degrees in either direction.

Note

Click the Reset button to return the image to the original position as needed during
centering.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-67


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Once the image(s) are centered, select the Profile tab.

Mouse over the Sketch Area to the left of centerline and notice the
cursor changes to a crosshair ( ). The cursor is designed so the point
is the exact pixel location of the edit point to assist in precise line
placement. While drawing, the point is not obscured by the line
being drawn.

Click the Color icon ( ) to choose a color for the pipe section from
the color palette. In this example, gray is chosen.

Left-click slightly left of centerline on the outline of the image profile to


insert an edit point. Sections are drawn vertically and the next edit point
must be inserted below or at the same level as the previous edit point.

Note

Grab and drag edit points to straighten sections and to clean up the symbol’s profile,
outer, and inner features. The example below represents a drag of the edit point
from one location to another. Notice that the cursor changes to a circle around the
edit point during mouseover. Left-click and hold (grab) the edit point and drag it to
another location or slightly move it to make minor alterations to the section.

Grab
and
drag

6-68 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Left-click to the left and lower than the initial edit point to add another
edit point along the background image profile.

CAUTION!

The Smooth ID icon ( ) will apply the ID setting saved in the Tree Mode tab
Symbol Properties area. If you desire to smooth the ID, do so early in symbol
creation to avoid the application of additional edits.

Continue to trace the background image profile. The example below


traces the profile of a packer. Switch from Pipe Section to Invisible
(and back again) from the Type picklist to draw the gap used for later
placement of the expandable seals.

Start Pipe Section

Start Invisible
Section

Start Pipe Section

End Pipe Section

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-69


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Once the profile is complete, the symbol should appear as follows:

Select the Outer Features tab to add slips and seals.

Click the Color icon ( ) to choose a color for the slips from the
color palette. In this example, dark red is chosen.

From the Type picklist, select Cutaway.

Click the Section Properties icon ( ) to open the Section Properties


dialog box.

Enter the following values in the Section Properties dialog box and then
click OK:

Field Name Value

No. 4

Start 0.00

Inner 30.00

End Angle 0.00

Outer Span 30.00

6-70 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Left-click the starting point of the upper slips, then continue to enter edit
points along the outline of the slip. Once the upper slips are complete,
the symbol should appear as follows.

After the end section of the last upper slip is placed, select Invisible
from the Type picklist.

Left-click to the start point of the expandable seals, then select Pipe
from the Type picklist.

Click the Color icon ( ) to choose a color for the expandable seals
from the color palette. In this example, black is chosen.

Create the seals, alternating between Pipe and Invisible section types
for the gaps between each seal. Once the seals are complete, the symbol
should appear as follows.

After the end section of the last seal is placed, select Invisible from the
Type picklist and insert an edit point at the start of the lower slips.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-71


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Finish drawing the lower slip sections using the same sketch process you
used to draw the upper slips. The example below traces the outer
features of the packer, showing the edit points where a switch from one
section type to another occurs.

Start Upper Slip

Invisible Section

Start Seals

Alternate between
Invisible Sections
and Pipe Sections

Invisible Section

Lower Slip
Sections
End

At completion, the packer appears as follows:

6-72 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Importing Symbols

Import Symbol Dialog Box


The Import Symbol dialog box allows the user to select a symbol or
group of symbols for import into Symbol Manager.

Follow the menu path:

File > Import

or click the Import icon ( ) to display the Open dialog box. Locate
and select the .SYM or .DXF file, then click Open.

Notes

• The .SYM file format is from a previous DIMS version of the PROFILE
software. If you do not have a previous version, you will not have any
.SYM files.
• The .DXF file format is the Drawing Interchange Format file associated
with AutoCAD.
• Only .SYM files display in the Converted Symbol area in all three views: 3D,
Solid, and Cutaway

Use the buttons below the Symbols area to select or deselect the symbols
that appear.

If you select a single symbol, the .SYM or .DXF file displays in the
Original Symbol preview area.

The symbol will also appear in the Converted Symbol area in all three
views: 3D, Solid, and Cutaway.

Click Save Current to save the selected (highlighted) file, or click Save
Selected to save files selected by check box. When finished,
click Close.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-73


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbol Mappings

Symbol Mapping is the process used to match an equipment component


type or Wellbore operation to a symbol file. This enables the downhole
schematic to be drawn based on available Wellbore data. The PROFILE
software ships with a default symbol map corresponding to the
equipment components types that are distributed in the EDM database.
Expert users can add and edit the equipment component type list as
required using the Symbol Mapping tool.

The Symbol Map dialog box is accessed through the PROFILE software
or Symbol Manager.

Symbol Mappings Dialog Box—PROFILE™ Software


To view the Symbol Mappings dialog box from the PROFILE software,
follow the menu path:

View > Symbol Map

Alternatively, click the Symbol Map icon ( ) in the Main toolbar.

The Symbol Mappings dialog box displays.

Symbol Mappings Dialog Box—Symbol Manager


To view the Symbol Mappings dialog box from Symbol Manager, click
the Symbol Map icon ( ) in the Main toolbar.

The Symbol Mappings dialog box displays.

6-74 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Symbols are used by the PROFILE software as pictorial representations


of components to construct a schematic drawing.

Symbol Mappings Dialog Box

Symbol Map Area


Use the File field to select the symbol mapping file to be used.

The Save button remains greyed out until a change has been made to a
symbol (that is, change in color). It then becomes available, allowing the
changed symbol to become part of the symbol mapping file.

The Save As button is used to create a new mapping file from the current
file displayed in the File field.

Click Delete to delete a symbol mapping file.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-75


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Mapping Area
Use the Mapping area of the dialog box to select Components and view
their description and symbol name.

Use the drop-down picklist to select the component type.

When a type is selected, all variations of that component and their


associated symbol are displayed below the component field:

Enter user
equipment
symbols in the
New
Component
field.

User-defined symbols can be added with the New Component field. The
text entered in the New Component field is listed as the symbol
Description. The PROFILE software automatically creates a Code
based on the first character of the text entered in the New Component
field. You can overwrite the automatic entry and enter a specific code,
if needed.

The Code is an abbreviated version of the component description


created when the symbol mapping was created.

The Type identifies whether the component is System Defined or Sys


(shipped with the tool), or created by the user (User).

When a symbol is selected, the pictorial representation of that


component is displayed in the Symbol Preview area.

6-76 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Click Previous to move through the components backwards


alphabetically (as listed in the drop-down picklist).

Click Next to move through the components in alphabetical order (as


listed in the drop-down picklist).

Mapped Symbols Area


When a component is selected, all of the variations of that component
are listed in the Mapped Symbols area.

Every component has a Default symbol.

When a symbol may be used to cover a longer distance in a schematic


(that is, tubing), a symbol withouta break is more desirable. In this case,
repeating symbols can be created.

The default repeat symbol appears as “Default (Repeat)” in the filter list.
If a component does not have a default repeat symbol listed, one can be
created by using the Create New button with the Manufacturer and
Model No fields left blank.

Components can have different symbols depending on the manufacturer


and/or model of the assembly component. For Wellhead components,
size can also be used when selecting a symbol.

Create New Button

Use the Create New button to create a symbol mapping filter for a
specific version of a component.

Enter the Manufacturer and/or Model.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-77


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Click Create New to add this mapping to the list.

Select the symbol to be mapped from the symbol picklist in the symbol
preview area below the list.

Update Button

Use the Update button to change the values of a symbol mapping filter.

Select the filter in the list.

Change the Manufacturer and/or Model as required.

Click Update to update the filter.

Delete Button

Use the Delete button to delete a symbol mapping filter.

Select the filter in the list.

Click Delete to remove the filter from the list.

Note

The default filters cannot be deleted.

Creating a symbolmapping filter with the same manufacturer and model


as an existing filter will create a repeat filter for it.

Wellhead Components

The Size filter parameter used for Wellhead components can be


displayed in a number of different units.

Select the units using the picklist next to the size filter.

Note

When searching for a Wellhead component that has a size specified, the PROFILE
software will find the filter entry with the closest matching size value. In this case,
the match does not have to be exact.

6-78 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

When a symbol is selected, the pictorial representation of that


component is displayed in the Symbol Preview area.

Symbol Preview Area


The Symbol Preview area shows the symbol selected in the Mapping
area in two views (if applicable).

The symbol description displays above the Symbol Preview area.

The symbol is shown in a full view (solid) and a cutaway view.

Use the Previous and Next buttons to browse through the components
displayed in the Mappings area.

Symbol Color Selector


Click the color bar to access the Color Selection Grid. Use the cursor to
select a color from the grid. The symbol will appear in the Symbol
Preview area in the new color.

If the color has been changed, click the Default button in the Color
Selection Grid to return to the default color for the symbol.

Click the Custom button located at the bottom of the Color Selection
Grid to access an enhanced Color dialog box.

The Dull and Shiny slider allows you to sharpen or dull the appearance
of the image.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-79


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Repeating Symbol Preview Area


When a symbol may be used to cover a longer distance in a schematic
(that is, tubing), a symbol withouta break is more desirable. In this case,
repeating symbols have been created.

Tubing Joint(s) Symbol

Tubing Joint(s) Repeating Symbol

The symbol is shown in a full view (solid) and a cutaway view.

Click Previous and Next to browse through the components displayed


in the Mappings area.

6-80 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

Summary

This chapter covered the functions available through Symbol Manager.


The tool is used to create and edit symbols for use in EDT™
applications. All menu items and toolbar options were explained in
detail. The symbol mapping process was also covered.

PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics 6-81


Chapter 6: Symbol Manager

6-82 PROFILE™ Software R5000.1: Learning the Basics

You might also like